JP7197529B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A jackpot game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived from a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable as a game machine and deriving a display result. There is a pachinko machine controlled by Such a gaming machine is configured so as to be controllable to a probability variable state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.

As such a gaming machine, any one of a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects including a first specific effect and a second specific effect can be executed, and when the first specific effect is executed, the display result of the identification information is If the specific display result is obtained, the given value is low, but the possibility of the probability changing state after the end of the jackpot game state is high, while when the second specific effect is executed, the display result of the identification information is specified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the value given increases when the display result is displayed, but the possibility of entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is low (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-30624 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it was not possible to suitably execute effects with different properties.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the enjoyment of a game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
When the variable display is in a specific state in which the variable display is performed at a higher rate than in the normal state, a first presentation state (for example, a state controlled to the pattern fanning mode, etc.) and a second presentation state (for example, a state controlled to the battle mode, etc.) ) and production state control means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-9, 18-10, 18-14, 18-21, 18-22 , Figures 18-25 to 18-27, etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-26, etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. If the variable display being controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the reserve storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one-time variable display, the performance different from the specific performance and a special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27, etc.),
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute a different effect from when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14 , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, another game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, a first state (for example, a second special figure jackpot X, a post-hit control state of a small jackpot via jackpot A, etc.) and the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state rather than the first state. is high second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit B, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit C, etc.) State control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.);
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
At the time of the first state or the second state, a first production state (for example, a state controlled to the pattern fanning mode, etc.) and a second production state (for example, a state controlled to the battle mode, etc.). State-controllable production state control means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-9, 18-10, 18-14, 18-21, 18-22, 18-25 ~ Fig. 18-27 etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , and when controlled to the second state after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect that displays the result of the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. one of the variable display being controlled and controlled to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state and being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the advantageous state is controlled can be executed. further comprising means (e.g., FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.);
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute a different effect from when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14 , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a hit type determination table; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the screen structural example. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation. It is a flow chart which shows production design variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a final production design, etc. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a small pattern determination process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows final fluctuation production processing. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition effect processing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example when an acquisition effect is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a character panel image; It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a holding|holding relevant data storage part. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a hit notice timing, etc. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing acquisition character determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the acquisition character number. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a winning announcement character and a losing announcement character; It is a figure which shows the example of control of acquisition production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows a small design change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an expectation increase production|presentation process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when an expectation increase production|effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the determination example of a hit notice expectation degree up, and a loss notice expectation degree up. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of expectation level raising conditions. It is a flow chart which shows notice production processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice production|presentation control pattern. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display example after the expectation level increasing effect is finished; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display example after the expectation level increasing effect is finished; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure per determination table related to the characteristic part 095AK. (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure per determination table related to the characteristic portion 095AK. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table|surface which concerns on the characteristic part 095AK. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special-figure jackpot type determination table related to the characteristic portion 095AK. (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure jackpot type determination table related to the characteristic portion 095AK. (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit via big-hit type determination table relating to the characteristic portion 095AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern related to a characteristic part 095AK; (A) to (D) are diagrams each showing an example of determination of a variation pattern related to the characteristic part 095AK. Both (A) and (B) are diagrams showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects in the state of being controlled in the pattern fanning mode related to the characteristic portion 095AK. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects in a state of being controlled to the battle mode related to the characteristic part 095AK. Both (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final time-saving variation related to the characteristic portion 095AK. (A) and (B) are both diagrams showing display examples when the mode selection effect relating to the characteristic portion 095AK is executed. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end production processing concerning feature part 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation design variation start process based on the characteristic part 095AK. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first on-hold related data storage unit related to the characteristic unit 095AK. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second on-hold related data storage unit related to the characteristic unit 095AK. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-variable display determination table relating to the characteristic portion 095AK. (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-variable display count determination table related to the characteristic portion 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation determination processing which concerns on the characteristic part 095AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction final fluctuation production|presentation determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 095AK. It is an explanatory diagram showing a super ready-to-win suggestion effect determination table related to the characteristic portion 095AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving final fluctuation production|presentation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 095AK. (A) to (D) are diagrams each showing an example of determination of the final time-saving variation effect pattern related to the characteristic portion 095AK. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design change concerning characteristic part 095AK. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design change concerning characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table|surface which concerns on the modification of characteristic part 095AK.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko game machine is shown as an example of a game machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine, and may be other game machines such as a coin game machine.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a frame-shaped glass provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. A door frame 2 is provided.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame is an upper plate forming a batted ball supply plate 3 . Below the hit ball supply tray 3, there are a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3, and a ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3. A ball hitting operation handle 5 is provided for operation. The hitting operation handle 5 is also called an operation knob. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 having a game area 7 in which hit game balls can flow down is detachably attached. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. - 特許庁A part of the game nails is shown in the game area 7 of FIG. The hitting ball shooting device is driven by a shooting motor, and the force (shooting intensity) for hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the rotational operation position of the hitting ball operation handle 5 . Thereby, the player can aim at a desired place in the game area 7 and shoot the game ball.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect patterns as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. In the game area 7, the first path of the downflow paths along which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 as viewed from the front, and the first path out of the downflow paths along which the game balls flow down is provided. A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area 7 . Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 7, so it may be called a right-handed path.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of separate routes, or may be routes that are partly shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like.

A game ball fired from a ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 5 and hit into the game area 7 is guided along, for example, an arrangement of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, guidance to the right game area becomes impossible or difficult. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure into which the game balls hit in the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9 . The first start winning opening 13 is provided with a first starting winning opening switch 13a inside as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V determination winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The V judgment winning device 87 is also called a V winning device. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning hole 14 in which game balls can win. In addition, as a switch for detecting the game ball that has entered into each, the gate switch 32a inside the gate 32, the second start winning opening switch 14a inside the second starting winning opening 14, the V judgment winning device Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively. In the following, the game ball winning (entering) the first start winning opening 13 is called the first starting winning, and the game ball winning (entering) the second starting winning opening 14 is called the second starting winning.

The first start winning port 13 serves as a start winning device for starting variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as variable display means (variable display means), and a game ball (start winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning structure. The second start winning port 14 serves as a start winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as variable display means (variable display means), and a game ball (start winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning port 13 of the prize winning port structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole 13, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting prize winning port 14 and the gate 32 of the prize winning structure. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player should hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right game area may enter the first start winning hole 13, but from the viewpoint of game performance, the possibility is that it is hit to the left game area. It is desirable to make the possibility of a game ball entering them extremely low. Conversely, it may be possible that the game ball hit to the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game performance, the possibility is limited to the right. It is desirable to make the possibility extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls hit into the game areas enter them.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs. A small hit is a hit in which the activation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become. The operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is provided separately from the big prize prize port of the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and also serves as the V big prize prize port as the second big prize prize port. The V judgment winning device 87 is also called a V winning device or a V attacker.

Inside the V determination winning device 87 into which the game ball can enter from the operation opening, a V winning region 870, which is a specific region, is located at the center of the bottom of the V determination winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a winning region in which the game ball can win. Further, an inclined path 871 is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 through an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning portion into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward a game ball entering from the V winning portion.

At the top end of the V winning section, which is the winning section of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state. ing. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 24, and can advance and retreat to open and close the V winning portion. When the V winning portion is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning portion is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall inside the winning ball area that can guide the game ball downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 after that is moved to the winning ball area. will enter. A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the inside of the V judgment prize winning device 87 from the operation opening in the small winning game state is detected by the V judgment prize switch 15a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize winning switch 15b. detected.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 15a and the V determination winning switch 15b reaches 10, the V determination winning device 87 whose operation opening is opened in the small winning game state closes the activation opening and plays the game. A ball cannot enter. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom. It is discharged to a predetermined discharge path arranged. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all game balls discharged by the switch are detected. When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, during a period in which a small hit is generated and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, about 10 game balls in total on average win V judgment prizes without requiring a special operation. Structural design and control design are made to allow entry into the device 87 . Further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87 , the game ball always (100%) enters the V winning area 870 . In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be. Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening in the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits left, it is possible to hit right. In this case, (100%) game balls always enter the V winning area 870 to generate a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

A part of the front side of the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a V lamp 875 which is a luminous body composed of an LED configured in the shape of the letter "V". The V lamp 875 basically emits white light when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 in the small winning game state. The V lamp 875, for example, can basically emit white light, but can change its emission color to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the game situation, such as when informing a player on hold. is. It should be noted that the V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface or inside the V judgment winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Also, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from the V judgment winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V judgment winning device 87, etc.).

The variable winning ball device 15 is in an advantageous state (open state) for a player who can enter the second start winning hole 14 with a game ball, and disadvantageous for a player who cannot enter the second starting winning hole 14 with a game ball. It is a function as a variable winning ball device that changes between a closed state and a closed state. A stopper member is provided to restrict entry of the game ball in the state. This opening winglet is driven by a solenoid 16 . The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening for a certain period of time (for example, one second) when the display result of the normal symbol is a win. In addition, in the state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state, it is difficult to win a prize, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning port 13 and the second start prize-winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as a start prize-winning port or a start port.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87 . Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, there is a first special symbol display that variably displays the first special symbol as variable display means that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. A device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol are provided. Both the first special design and the second special design are included in the special design. Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers, letters and other symbols. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). In the display screen of the production display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special design or the second special design, various images such as the variable display of the production design as a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified are displayed. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a pattern display area (symbol display area) that variably displays three decorative (effect) patterns (also called decorative patterns) of "left", "middle", and "right". is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 . When the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variation display, and the second special symbol display is performed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, if the performance display device 9 executes the performance display along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display device ( variable display unit).

In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, but the game machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator. When only one special symbol display device is provided, only one start winning opening may be provided. In addition, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plurality) start winning openings are provided, and one special symbol display is displayed even when a game ball wins in any of the starting winning openings. A variable display may be controlled. In addition, when two (plural) special symbol indicators are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and the two special symbol indicators are variably displayed in a predetermined order (for example, variably displayed for each start winning). (such as switching the special symbol display) may be controlled.

A jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the game area 7 . The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is arranged at a position where a game ball struck to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. In addition, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 has a jackpot with a front surface covered with a rectangular door, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the base by a solenoid 21 to reveal the jackpot. (opens mouth). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting a game ball that has entered is provided. To the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a winning route is set by a game nail or other structures so that the game ball can enter the big winning hole only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

When a game ball wins in any one of the first start prize winning port 13, the second start prize winning port 14, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the V judgment prize winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls is determined accordingly. is paid out. Note that prize balls may be paid out even when game balls pass through the gate 32 . In addition, at least one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be configured such that no prize balls are paid out even if a game ball wins.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 through which hit balls that do not win a prize are taken. In addition, four speakers 27 for uttering effect sounds and voices as predetermined audio outputs are provided in the upper left and right parts and the lower left and right parts outside the game area 7 . A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7 .

A big hit is obtained when a big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 8a, and when a big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 8b. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first start winning hole 13, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display 8a. When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting prize opening 14, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display 8b. In this way, a big win game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b can be called a "big hit by special symbols" or a "special symbol big hit." ”.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁A game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a is called V winning. When a small win occurs, a big win can occur under the condition of V winning. The small hit game state is a game state in which the operation opening is opened in the V judgment winning device 87 when a small hit occurs. In the small winning game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small win" or a "big win via a small win".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a given value. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be repeatedly controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the jackpot game state, repetitive continuation control is performed with the actuation opening of the V judgment winning device 87, which is a V winning device, as the V big winning opening, and the V big winning opening may repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. . In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the big winning opening of the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is open or the state in which the V big winning opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is open is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the big winning game state, when the big winning opening of the big winning variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the big winning opening is closed in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the open state. The condition for terminating the open state of the big prize hole is when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has passed since the big prize hole was opened, or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. It is sufficient if the opening end condition is set to be satisfied when the condition is satisfied. When the condition for terminating the opening of the big winning hole is satisfied and the continuation right is generated, the big winning hole of the variable big winning ball device 20 is opened again. The continuation right of the round to open the big winning hole of the variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly generated until the final round (8 rounds or 10 rounds) in which the number of opening times in the big winning game state reaches a predetermined upper limit. It is possible.

In the jackpot game state, when the V big winning opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, the V big winning opening is closed in response to establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the open state. The condition for terminating the open state of the V big winning hole as the second big winning hole is when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed since the V big winning hole was opened, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 It is sufficient if the opening end condition is set so as to be satisfied when the number of winning balls is generated. The open end condition may be partially or wholly different between the open state of the big prize winning slot and the open state of the V big prize winning hole, or may be common to some or all of them. . When the condition for terminating the opening of the V big prize opening is satisfied and the continuation right is generated, the operation opening which becomes the V big prize opening is opened again in the V judgment prize winning device 87 which is the V prize winning device. . The continuation right of the round in which the V big prize opening of the V winning device is opened can be generated repeatedly until the final round (5 rounds or 10 rounds) in which the number of opening times in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit. be. The number of openings to reach the final round may be partly or wholly different between the case where the big winning slot is opened and the case where the V big winning slot is opened. may be common.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition of the variable display after the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied, When the fluctuation display time such as the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the fixed special symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is derived as the display result. The first start condition is the first execution condition corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, based on the occurrence of the first start winning that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening 13 as the starting winning area can be established. The second start condition is a second execution condition corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, based on the occurrence of the second start winning that the game ball passes through the second start winning opening 14 as the starting winning area can be established. The condition for starting the variable display can be established, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. The passage of the game ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and is a concept that includes winning due to the game ball entering the winning opening. Further, the derivation of the display result is final display for stopping display of the display pattern as the identification information.

Regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Stores information about variable display for which the conditions are not met. The storage of information about such variable displays is called pending storage. The term pending storage is also used to indicate (identify) information that is stored pending. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 13 . As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 . When a big hit occurs in the state where such a first reserved memory or a second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory which existed before the occurrence of the big prize is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the big win game state is finished. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, even if there is already a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is given priority. is executed. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second second display consisting of one display that displays the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved memories. A special symbol reservation memory display 18b is provided. The second special symbol reservation memory display 18b lights up the second special symbol reservation memory display 18b every time there is an effective start winning prize, and every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, The second special symbol reservation memory display 18b is extinguished. Further above the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, a first special symbol reserved memory display consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved memories. A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol holding storage display 18a increases the number of indicators that light up each time there is an effective start winning prize. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lights on the display is reduced by one.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display device 10 for variably displaying identifiable normal symbols. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is implemented by a simple and small display device such as a 7-segment LED that can variably display numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers or symbols of 0-9. Also, the small display is formed in a rectangular shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol included in the winning symbol, for example, symbol "7", a win occurs, and the variable winning ball device 15 is changed from a closed state disadvantageous to the player to a predetermined time. Only when it changes to an open state that is advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, there is provided a normal symbol holding memory display 41 having a display portion by four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32.例文帳に追加Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol reservation memory display 41 increases the lighting LED by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

A stick controller 122 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁The stick controller 122 can be gripped by the player and tilted in a plurality of directions, such as front, back, left, and right. A trigger button 125 is provided on the stick controller 122 , and a trigger sensor 121 is built in an operation rod of the stick controller 122 . The trigger button 125 is pressed and pulled with a predetermined operating finger such as the index finger in a state in which the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operating hand such as the left hand, for example. is possible. The trigger sensor 121 can detect the action of the player, such as a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation on the trigger button 125 . A tilting direction sensor unit 123 is provided inside the main body of the bottom plate at the bottom of the stick controller 122, and the stick controller 122 has a vibrator motor 126 built therein. The tilting direction sensor unit 123 can detect a player's motion such as a tilting operation on the operating rod. The vibrator motor 126 is an eccentric motor for vibrating the stick controller 122 .

A push button 120 is provided on a member forming the batted ball supply tray 3 on the upper tray of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁The push button 120 is arranged, for example, above the stick controller 122, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body, and the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. The push button 120 may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. The push sensor 124 can detect the action of the player, such as pressing the push button 120 .

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game state and the performance state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a game rich in variety by shooting game balls according to the game situation. The player should be able to selectively use "left hitting" aiming at the left game area and "right hitting" aiming at the right game area as game ball shooting according to the game situation in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole 13 by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the display result is a big win (big win by the special symbol), the left-handed hitting is switched to the right-handed hitting, and the game is played aiming at the released big-hit variable winning ball device 20.例文帳に追加. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-handed promotion notification is given on the screen of the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 . The hitting-to-the-right promotion information is also called the hitting-to-the-right information.

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 and the V jackpot of the V judgment prize winning device 87 which are in the open state by hitting to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, if a special state is reached, the game is continued by hitting to the right. After the end of the jackpot game, special state start notification for notifying the start of the special state is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9 if the special state is established. Further, during the special state, right-handed promotion notification is also performed. After the special state is finished, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the special state is finished, so that the right-hand hitting is switched to the left-hand hitting and the game is played so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole 13.例文帳に追加. When the special state ends, a left-handed promotion notification may be performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to return to left-handed play. Left-handed promotion information is also called left-handed information.

During the special state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is played aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning hole 14 by hitting to the right. When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and the display result becomes a big win (a big win by a special pattern), the game is played aiming at the big win variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device 87 while striking to the right. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting winning port 14 and the display result becomes a small winning pattern which is the result of the small winning display, the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state. A game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 while striking to the right. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification for notifying the start of the small winning game state is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9.例文帳に追加Further, when controlled to the small winning game state, for example, the start timing of the small winning display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning, or the small winning display is executed. Right-handed promotion notification is also performed at specific timing according to the game situation, such as a predetermined timing before being played.

When the operating opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operating opening into the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When the V winning occurs, the V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. - 特許庁Further, when the small winning game state ends, a small winning end notification for notifying that the small winning game state has ended is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. - 特許庁After the end of the small win, the big win game state is entered and the big win variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, so that the player can hit the right hand while hitting the big hitting variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment prize winning device. A game is played aiming at 87.

When a game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in a small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win occurs. do not. In this way, when the V prize is not generated during the small winning game state, the failure of the V prize is reported on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification for notifying that the small winning game state has ended is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9.例文帳に追加After the end of the small winning game state, while the special state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while striking to the right. When the special state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start winning hole 13 by switching from right hitting to left hitting. At the end of the special state, a time-saving termination notification for notifying that the time-saving is completed on the screen of the performance display device 9 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 2 shows a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each hit type, conditions for generating a hit, control state after a hit, number of openings, and the like. The post-hit control state is a controllable game state after the big-hit game state ends. The number of times of opening indicates the number of times of execution of rounds to be a jackpot game, including the opening time in each round. In the hit type table shown in FIG. 2, the hit types are the first special big win A, the first special big win B, the first special big win C, the second special big win, the big win X through the small win, and the big win through the small win. Y and a big hit Z via a small hit are provided.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole 14 provided in a variable winning ball device 15 and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game state controlled after the end of the small-hit game state is the same as before the small-hit unless controlled to the big-hit game state. During the small winning game state, prize balls are paid out according to the game balls that have entered the inside of the V judgment prize winning device 87. - 特許庁When the display result of the special pattern does not become a big winning pattern or a small winning pattern, the display result of the special pattern becomes a losing pattern.

When the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small hit, the game ball is entered into the operation opening, and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), A big hit occurs via a small hit. The big win via small win includes a big win X via a small win, a big win Y via a small win, and a big win Z via a small win according to a plurality of types of jackpot game states in which one or both of the post-win control state and the number of times of opening are different. be The small win via big win X can execute a round in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as the V big winning port in the big win game state, and the number of rounds is 10 rounds. The small hit in the small hit via jackpot X is also referred to as the first small hit. The small-hit via big-hit Y can execute rounds in which the operation opening of the V determination prize-winning device 87 is opened as the V big prize-winning opening in the big-hit game state, and the number of rounds is 10 rounds. The small hit in the small hit via jackpot Y is also referred to as a second small hit. The big win via small win Z can execute a round in which the big winning hole of the variable big winning ball device 20 is opened in the big win game state, and the number of rounds is 5 rounds. The small hit in the small hit via jackpot Z is also called a third small hit. In the "number of times of opening" in FIG. 2, the case where the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened corresponding to the small winning game state is indicated by "V winning device", and the V judgment winning device corresponds to the big winning game state. "V big winning opening" indicates the case where the operation opening of 87 is opened as the V big winning opening.

A big hit that occurs directly by the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is also called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a first special symbol jackpot A, a first special symbol jackpot B, and a first special symbol jackpot C according to a controllable jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol. A second special symbol jackpot is included according to the jackpot game state controllable based on the variable display of the two special symbols.

As the big hits, there are the symbol big hits that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the small winning via big wins that occur by V winning via the small winnings based on the variable display of the second special symbol. and are included. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state is finished. The advantageous state for the player includes the opening of the big winning opening of the variable winning ball device 20 in the big winning game state and the opening of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 as the V big winning opening. as long as it is

The special state is an example of a game state different from the jackpot game state among advantageous states advantageous to the player. In the special state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, thereby facilitating the winning of the second starting winning port 14 (high high base control is performed. The "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in accordance with winning prizes to the number of shot balls. Active control to increase this ratio is called "high-base control", and a state in which high-base control is performed is also referred to as a high-base state, and a state in which high-base control is not performed is also referred to as a low-base state. The high-base control is realized, for example, as a control that increases the occurrence of a starting winning prize that triggers the start of fluctuation of special symbols. Therefore, by increasing the frequency and number of openings of the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) or by lengthening the opening time of one time, the second start winning opening provided in the variable winning ball device 15 It can be realized as a control for facilitating winning to 14. The control in which the variable winning ball device 15 is likely to be in an open state and the game ball is likely to pass through the second start winning opening 14 is also referred to as an electric chew support control or an electric support. In the high base state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 which triggers the variation of the special symbols, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased to increase the variable winning ball device. Winning to 15 is facilitated (higher entry, higher frequency).

As the high base control and the electric chew support control, part or all of normal symbol shortening control, normal symbol probability variable control, opening time extension control, and opening number increasing control are performed. The normal symbol shortening control is a control to derive and display the display result early by shortening the variation time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation display of the display result. The normal symbol probability variation control is a control that increases the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol. The open time extension control is a control to lengthen the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 which is a normal electric accessory. The opening frequency increase control is a control for increasing the opening frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers the variation of the special symbols. When such control is performed, compared to when the control is not performed, the variable winning ball device 15, which triggers the variation of the special symbols, has a higher ratio of time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state, so that the game balls are easier to start and win. Become.

The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot A can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 100 times. In the post-hit control state of the first special figure big hit B, the special state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbols is performed 15 times. In the post-hit control state of the first special figure jackpot C, the special state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed three times. In the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot, the special state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbols is performed 100 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit X via the small hit can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit Y via the small hit can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit Z via the small hit can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. In this way, after the big win game state is finished, the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the special state is set to the number of times corresponding to the winning type, such as 3 times, 15 times or 100 times. . If a big win occurs based on the variable display of special symbols before the end of the special state, after the end of the big win game state, the special state will continue until the number of times of variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the type of winning again. controllable.

In the setting of the hit type shown in FIG. 2, when the hit type is the first special-figure jackpot B, when the hit type is the first special-figure jackpot C, it is in a special state as the post-hit control state. Since the number of times of variable display that can be executed increases, a big win that is advantageous to the player is generated. When the winning type is the first special-figure jackpot A, the post-hits control state is a special state compared to the case where the winning type is either the first special-figure jackpot B or the first special-figure jackpot C. Since the number of times of variable display that can be executed is increased, a big win that is advantageous to the player is generated. In this way, the jackpot game states that can be controlled in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are, for example, the jackpot game state in the case of the first special jackpot C, which is the first advantageous state, and the first jackpot jackpot A. , a big win game state in any case of the first special figure big win B, which is a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.

In the special state, time-saving control may be performed in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened compared to the normal state. On the other hand, in a special state, time saving control does not need to be performed. While the high base control and electric chew support control are performed in the special state, the time saving control is not performed, for example, 3 times, even if the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the special state is small. Also, the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state, and the period during which the game ball can easily pass through the second starting winning hole 14 can be sufficiently secured, and the player can enter the second starting winning hole 14 by hitting to the right. Makes it easier to pass the ball. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of 1/15. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the possibility of generating a big win via a small win is greatly increased as compared with the big win by the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special symbol big win. With such a setting, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win. In the special state, the shooting of the game ball toward the second starting winning hole 14 is promoted by hitting to the right, and it becomes possible to realize a game property different from that in the normal state.

The first starting prize-winning port 13 is provided so that a prize can be won from the first route. Since the high base control and the electric chew support control are not performed in the normal state, which is the low base state, the game ball flowing down the first path is more likely to start winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. It is advantageous for the player in terms of The big hit variable winning ball device 20 and the V determination winning device 87 are provided so as to be able to win from the second route. During the jackpot game state, since the big win opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 and the V big winning opening of the V judgment winning device 87 are opened, the game ball flowing down the second path is the second one. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when game balls flow down one path. Since the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to generate a big hit than the game ball flowing down the first path. It is advantageous for the player. It should be noted that it is advantageous for the player that the game medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and in other game states, the second path is used. A configuration may be adopted in which the flow of the medium is more advantageous for the player. For example, the other winning openings are provided in the first path and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second path, and the high In other states such as the base state, the big-hit game state, and the small-hit game state, a configuration may be adopted in which the second path is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first path. Other prize winning openings may be other variable winning openings that may be for start winning or non-start winning.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the performance control board 80, and the like. The main board 31 is equipped with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), etc., a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I/O port section. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which ROM 54 and RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further incorporates a random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by hardware circuits).

The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, partly or wholly of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 55 are saved for a predetermined period. The predetermined period during which the contents of the RAM 55 can be saved may be the period from when the power supply is stopped until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes incapable of supplying power. At least, the data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means, such as the special symbol process flag, and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM54. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 560 or the CPU 56 executes control or processes, specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 31 .

A random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination. The random number for determination is used to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit according to the display result of the variable display of special symbols. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value and the upper limit are set. The initial value of numerical data may be 0, for example. The upper limit of numerical data may be 65535, for example. In the random number circuit 503, the numerical data to be read out becomes a random number based on the fact that the timing of the starting prize generated at random timing is the timing of reading out (extracting) the numerical data. Thus, the random number circuit 503 has a function of generating random numbers by updating or reading numerical data. Also, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 .

An input driver circuit 58 and an output circuit 59 are mounted on the main board 31 . The input driver circuit 58 receives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning opening switch 87a, the V judgment winning opening switch 15a, and the V judgment discharging switch 15b. is provided to the game control microcomputer 560. The output circuit 59 includes a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 that opens and closes the V judgment winning device 87 (movable part 872), and V winning judgment winning. The solenoid 22 for opening/closing the device 87 (area 870 movable portion 87) and the solenoid 24 for opening/closing the V winning area 870 (opening/closing member) are driven according to commands from the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of paid balls by controlling the ball payout device 97 .

The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display device 8a that variably displays special symbols, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol reservation memory display device. 18a, the display control of the second special symbol reservation memory display 18b and the normal symbol reservation memory display 41 is performed.

The production control board 80 is equipped with a production control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I/O port section 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs, data, and the like for effect control such as display control. A RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100 . The VDP 109 performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 .

The effect control microcomputer 100 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 31 to the direction of the effect control board 80. In addition to performing variable display control of the effect display device 9, through the lamp driver board 35, display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side, display control of the V lamp 875, and voice output board Various effect control such as control of sound output from the speaker 27 via 70 is performed.

The effect control CPU 101 receives operation detection signals from the trigger sensor 121 , the tilting direction sensor unit 123 and the push sensor 124 via the I/O port section 105 . The operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 121 is an information signal indicating the detection of an action, such as a pushing/pulling operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122, which will be the player's operation act. The operation detection signal from the tilting direction sensor unit 123 is an information signal indicating the detection of an action, such as a tilting operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 122, which is an act of manipulation by the player. The operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 is an information signal indicating detection of an action, such as an act of pressing the push button 120, which is an act of operation by the player. The effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I/O port section 105 .

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the type of random number, update range, usage, and addition conditions. As types of random numbers shown in FIG. 4, random R and randoms 1 to 5 are provided. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Hit type (hit type, 1st special figure jackpot A to 1st special figure jackpot C, jackpot via small hit X to jackpot Z via small hit), jackpot pattern and jackpot Determine the design (for winning type determination, for winning design determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the type of variation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

The jackpot based on the first special symbol includes jackpots in a plurality of hit types, such as first special jackpot A to first special jackpot C. Small wins based on the second special symbols include small wins in a plurality of types of wins, such as a big win X through a small win to a big win Z through a small win. Based on the value of random R which is a random number for hit determination, when it is determined to be a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol, or when it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit in the variation display of the second special symbol. Then, the winning type is determined to be one of the types based on the value of random 1, which is the random number for determining the winning type. In the case of a big win via a small win, the determined big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. When the winning type is determined, a fixed special symbol to be a big winning symbol or a small winning symbol is determined based on the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the winning kind. For the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined using random 2, which is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and any included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using random 3, which is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. Decide on a variation pattern. A variation pattern is determined by such a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, and a reach fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type with reach. The variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different when the display result is out of order when it is in a special state and when it is not in a special state, so when it is in a special state , it becomes possible to select a variation pattern different from that when not in a special state.

The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small win is made and a variation pattern type that cannot be selected when a small win is made. For example, a variation pattern type in which an effect related to a small win is executed and a variation pattern type in which an effect unrelated to a small win is executed may be prepared in advance. Variation pattern types that can be selected when a small win is achieved may include a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect relating to a small win is executed. When a variation pattern is executed in which a predetermined suggestive effect related to such a small win is executed, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations. Variation pattern types that can be selected when a small hit is made may be selectable both when a small win is made and when a small win is not made. Variation pattern types that can be selected when a small win is achieved may be selectable both when a small win is achieved and when a big win is achieved. As a result, even if the type of variation pattern is selectable when a small win is achieved, it may occur when the small win is not achieved, so that the player is preliminarily aware that the type of variation pattern to be executed will result in a small win. You can keep it from getting lost. On the other hand, the type of variation pattern that cannot be selected when a small win is made is, for example, a variation pattern that is not related to a small win, such as a variation pattern that suggests that a big win will be made directly without going through a small win. By disabling selection when a small win is achieved, it is possible to avoid complicating the relationship between the effect of the variation pattern and the display result. Variation patterns that can be selected for a small hit may be set so as to be selected based on the correspondence with the opening control of the V-judgment winning device 87. By making it possible to execute such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect relating to the small win is executed when the small win occurs, the player's expectation for the small win can be heightened at the time of the variable display. can. Furthermore, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small winning game state that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain a big win. It is possible to make it difficult for players to escape the advantageous state in which the game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87.例文帳に追加

A variation pattern that can be selected when a small win is achieved may not be one in which a predetermined suggestive effect relating to a small win is executed. Variation patterns may be provided separately for when a small win, when a loss is made, and when a big win is made. Variation patterns are not classified according to whether the variation pattern is a small win, a loss, or a big win, and the range of the variation pattern type to be selected regardless of the variation display result. may be the same. Instead of setting the variation pattern type and the variation pattern separately and determining the variation pattern by a two-stage lottery process, the variation pattern type is not provided and only the random number for determining the variation pattern is used to change in one stage. A pattern may be determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, a first special figure big hit type determination table, a second special figure big hit type determination table, and a small hit via big hit determination table. is. These tables are stored in the ROM 54 . The first special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5A is a data table for making a big hit determination for the first special symbol. The second special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(B) is a data table for making a big hit determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(C) is a data table for determining the hit type when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(D) is a data table for determining the hit type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. The small-hit via-big-hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5(E) is a data table for determining the type of hit when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small-hit.

As for the 1st special figure hit decision table, the big hit decision value which is compared with the value of random R which is the random number for hit decision should have been set. The big-hit probability by setting the big-hit determination value in the first special-hit determination table indicates the ratio of the big-hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. As for the 2nd special figure hit decision table, the big hit decision value and the small hit decision value which are compared with the value of random R which is the random number for hit decision are set. The big-hit probability by setting the big-hit determination value in the second special-hit determination table indicates the ratio of the big-hit in the variable display of the second special symbol. The small-hit probability by setting the small-hit determination value in the second special-hit determination table indicates the ratio of the small-hit in the variable display of the second special symbol.

When the CPU 56 detects the first start winning that is the starting winning to the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning that is the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14, the CPU 56 generates a random number at a predetermined timing. Extract the random R count value from circuit 503 . As for the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. In this case, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value is one of the small hit determination values. If it matches the value, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. A decision to make a small win means a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win. In the case of a small win, it is not controlled to a big win unless a V winning occurs, so it is a provisional decision that a big win can occur but the big win is not yet determined.

The determination of whether or not to make a big hit includes the determination of whether or not to shift to the big win game state, and the determination of whether or not to make the stopped symbols by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol a big winning symbol. , including The determination of whether or not to make a small hit includes the determination of whether or not to shift to the small win gaming state, and the determination of whether or not to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol a small win symbol. I'm in. The first special symbol is set so as not to be judged as a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set so as to be judged as a small hit with a predetermined probability.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table, the second special figure jackpot determination table, and the small hit via jackpot determination table each have a hit type determination value that is compared with the value of random 1, which is a random number for hit type determination. Just do it. The hit type determination value in the first special-figure jackpot type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the first special-figure jackpot A to the first special-figure jackpot C. In the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The hit type determination value is set so that the first special figure jackpot C is determined at a ratio of /100. The hit type determination value in the second special figure big hit type determination table may be set corresponding to the second special figure big hit. In the second special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5(D), the hit kind determination value is set so that the second special figure big hit is determined at a ratio of 100/100. The hit type determination value in the small hit via big hit type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the small hit via big hit X to the small hit via big hit Z. In the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. The hit type determination value is set so that the big hit Z via the small hit is determined at a rate.

The hit type determination value is also used as a determination value for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern and the jackpot pattern or small hit pattern of the second special pattern. Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the hit type corresponding to the hit type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the hit type, and determines the random hit type as the jackpot pattern or the small win pattern. A big hit pattern or a small hit pattern with a matching value of 1 is determined. Thereby, the winning type and the big winning design or the small winning design corresponding to the winning type may be determined at the same time.

The game control microcomputer 560 transmits various production control commands to the production control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state. A plurality of types of effect control commands that can be transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 include, for example, a variation pattern command, a display result specification command, a first symbol variation specification command, a second symbol variation specification command, a symbol determination specification command, and a winning start. Designated command, large winning mouth opening specified command, big winning mouth opening specified command, winning end specified command, 1st start winning specified command, 2nd starting winning specified command, normal state specified command, special state specified command, first One of the reserved memory number designation command, the second reserved memory number designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the small hit start designation command, the small hit end designation command, the V prize designation command, and the V judgment winning ball detection designation command It is sufficient if it contains some or all of the commands.

The variation pattern command designates a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variably displayed special symbols. For example, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, it is sufficient if there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. The variation pattern command is also a command for specifying the start of variation, and the performance control CPU 101 receiving the variation pattern command controls the performance display device 9 to start the performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. The display result designation command designates display results including a losing display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result. The first symbol variation specification command specifies to start the variation display of the first special symbol. The second symbol variation specification command specifies to start the variation display of the second special symbol. The design determination designation command designates to end the variation of the first special design and the second special design.

The hit start designation command designates the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type. The command for specifying during the opening of the big winning prize designates the display during the opening of the big winning prize or during the opening of the V big winning prize in each round. The designation command after opening the big winning prize gate designates the display according to the closing after the opening of the big winning prize gate in each round or the opening of the V big winning prize gate. The hit end designation command designates the end of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type. The first start winning designation command designates that there is a first starting winning. The second start winning designation command designates that there has been a second starting winning. The normal state designation command designates that the game state is the normal state, that is, the low base state. The special state designation command designates that the game state is a special state, that is, a high base state. The first reserved memory number designation command designates the first reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number designation command designates the second reserved memory number. The symbol designation command is a big hit or a small hit according to the judgment result of the big hit judgment, the small hit judgment, or the hit type judgment among the judgment results at the time of the start winning to the first start winning prize port 13 or the second start winning prize port 14 Whether or not it will be, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the determination result of the hit type are specified. The variation type command designates the determination result of the variation pattern type determination among the determination results at the time of winning at the time of start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 .

The small hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state. The small-hit end designation command designates the end of the small-hit game state. The V prize designation command designates that there is a V prize. The V determination winning ball detection specification command designates detection of winning balls to the V determination winning device 87 including both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls.

The RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 is provided with a first reserved storage buffer and a second reserved storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer can store pending information regarding the first special symbol. The second pending storage buffer is capable of storing pending information regarding the second special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number, such as 4, is secured. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number, such as 4, is reserved. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are random R, which is a random number for determining a hit, as a hardware random number, random 1, which is a random number for determining a hit type, and random numbers for determining a variation pattern type as software random numbers. A random number 2 and a random number for determining a variation pattern, random 3, can be stored in association with the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. The data constituting the pending information stored in the first pending storage buffer is also referred to as first pending storage data. The data constituting the pending information stored in the second pending storage buffer is also referred to as second pending storage data. In this way, the first suspension storage buffer stores the suspension information based on the first suspension storage data such as the hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 . In the second suspension storage buffer, suspension information by the second suspension storage data such as a hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting prize winning port 13, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserve storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. Based on the winning of the second start winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. Storing such information about the initial winning in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is also referred to as pending storage.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and timer interrupt processing is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed. In the main process, for example, necessary initial setting process, normal initialization process, non-normal game state recovery process, random number circuit setting process (random number circuit 503 is initialized), display random number update process (variation pattern Various random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), and initial value random number update processing (normal value per symbol determination random number generation counter update processing) etc. are executed.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter also simply indicated as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process (S20) is executed to detect whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power has turned on). Next, in the switch process (S21), through the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start prize opening switch 13a, the second start prize opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V prize switch 87a, the V judgment prize switch 15a and the detection signals of the V judgment discharge switch 15b are inputted, and their states are judged.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the display control process (S22), the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, the normal symbol display device 10, the first special symbol reservation storage display device 18a, the second Display control of the special symbol reservation memory display 18b and the normal symbol reservation memory display 41 is performed. For the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33 to run. In addition, the random number update process for judgment (S23) is executed, and the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as the random number for judgment of normal symbol hit used for game control and the random number for judgment of small hit type is updated. do. The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25) to update the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number. Subsequently, the CPU 56 executes a special symbol process process (S26), and according to the special symbol process flag, the display states of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 are displayed. The operating openings of the V judgment winning device 87 including the big winning opening and the V big winning opening are controlled in a predetermined order. In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated according to the game state.

Then, the normal design process processing (S27) is executed, and the display state of the normal design display device 10 is controlled in a predetermined order according to the normal design process flag. In the normal design process processing, the value of the normal design process flag is updated according to the game state. Further, the CPU 56 executes a production control command control process (S28) and sends a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. Further, the CPU 56 executes an information output process (S29), and outputs data such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability variation information to be supplied to the hall management computer, for example.

In addition, the CPU 56 executes the prize ball processing (S30), and sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start prize winning port switch 13a, the second start prize winning port switch 14a and the accessory prize winning switch 25a. Subsequently, an output process (S31) is executed to output to the output port the contents of the ON/OFF state of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Then, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol display control process (S32), and sets the special symbol display control data for effecting display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol display control data setting. Set to output buffer. Further, the CPU 56 executes a normal symbol display control process (S33), normal symbol display control data for normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag, and normal symbol display control data setting normal symbol display control data. Set to output buffer. The CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display device 10 . After that, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the timer interrupt processing ends. By the above control, the game control process is started at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the big winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a starting port switch passing process is executed (S311). Then, according to the internal state indicated by the value of the special symbol process flag, one of the processes of S300 to S310 is performed.

In the starting port switch passage processing (S311), if the first starting port switch 13a is turned on, the number of first reserved memories does not reach an upper limit value such as 4, for example. The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number of stored data is incremented by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be numerical data including, for example, a hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. These numerical data are stored and saved in a save area in the first reserved storage buffer. In the starting port switch passing process, if the second starting port switch 14a is turned on, the second reserved memory data is stored on the condition that the second reserved memory number does not reach an upper limit value such as 4. The value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting numbers is increased by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be numerical data including, for example, a hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. These numerical data are stored and saved in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer.

The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit or a small win, and determining the hit type in the case of a big hit or a small win. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining a variation pattern and controlling the start of the variation time timer. The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling transmission of a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The special symbol fluctuation process (S303) is a process to advance the process to a special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. In the special symbol stop processing (S304), the variation display on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b is performed when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is counted by the variation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

The big winning hole opening pre-processing (S305) is a process for performing control, etc. for opening the big winning hole in the big winning variable winning ball device 20 when a big winning game state is entered. The processing during opening of the big winning prize gate (S306) performs the control of transmitting the production control command for the round display during the jackpot game state to the production control microcomputer 100, the processing of confirming the establishment of the conditions for closing the big winning prize gate, and the like. processing. When the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied and there is still no remaining round, the process shifts to big winning end processing. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process for performing control, etc. for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot game state.

The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a process for performing control such as opening the operation opening in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit game state is entered. Small hit opening process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not the game ball has won a V prize in the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87, and transmitting a V prize designation command when the V prize has been won, and , It is a process of performing processing such as a process of transmitting a small hit end designation command when the end timing of a small hit comes. The small-hit ending process (S310) is a process for shifting to a big-hit gaming state when a game ball has won a V-award in the V-winning area 870 in the big-hit variable winning ball device 20, and includes transmission of a big-hit start designation command and a big-hit game. Setting of display time, setting of jackpot opening mode, setting of transition of process flag of big winning port opening preprocessing, etc. This is the process of executing the process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passage processing of S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in response to the detection of the first starting winning (S1212). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number is four. If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number R for determining a hit, a random number 1 for determining a winning type, a random number 2 for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number 3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted, Stored in the save area. In this case, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (S1215). In the prize-winning performance processing, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are determined in advance at the time of the start-up winning before the fluctuation is executed with respect to the fluctuation based on the detected first start-up winning.

After the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as holding information, when the condition for starting the changing display is satisfied, the changing display is performed. At the timing of starting, in the special symbol normal processing (S300), based on the reservation information, the variation display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that starts the variable display is the big hit display result. Determination of whether or not, determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is to be a small hit display result, and determination of the hit type are determined by the big hit determination value, the small hit determination value, and the , based on the hit type determination value. Then, determination of the variation pattern including the variation pattern type in the variation pattern setting process (S301) is performed based on the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to various random numbers.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, specifically, the game ball is the first start At the timing when the holding information is stored by the starting winning in the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the holding information storing various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is read in advance, and based on the read ahead holding information. Then, determination of whether or not a big hit will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the variation pattern type are determined in advance by a big hit determination value set corresponding to various random numbers. , small hit determination value, hit type determination value, and, based on the variation pattern type determination value, executes the winning effect processing for prefetching determination. As a result, the performance control microcomputer 100 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, during the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pre-reading notice of a big hit or a notice of the possibility of a big win.

CPU56, based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning in S1215, the control of transmitting the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1216), the control of transmitting the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( S1217) is performed. In addition, the CPU 56 controls (S1218) to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and transmits the first reserved memory number designation command corresponding to the value of the first reserve memory number counter to the effect control microcomputer. Control for transmission to the computer 100 (S1219) is performed. By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, each time a start prize is entered in the first start prize opening 13 regardless of the game state such as a high probability state, a low probability state, a high base state, a low base state, a jackpot game state, etc. , Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 . By executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start winning prize designation command and the first reserved storage number designation command are sent collectively within one timer interrupt.

In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state (S1221). If the second starter switch 14a is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (S1222). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 4 or not. If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated. If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number R for determining a hit, a random number 1 for determining a winning type, a random number 2 for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number 3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted, Stored in the save area. After that, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect process similar to S1215 (S1225).

CPU56, based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning in S1225, the control of transmitting the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1226), the control of transmitting the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( S1227) is performed. In addition, the CPU 56 controls (S1228) to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and transmits the second reserve memory number designation command corresponding to the value of the second reserve memory number counter to the effect control microcomputer. Control for transmission to the computer 100 (S1229) is performed. By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, every time a start prize is won in the second start prize opening 14 regardless of the game state such as a high probability state, a low probability state, a high base state, a low base state, a jackpot game state, etc. , Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 . By executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command are sent collectively within one timer interrupt. In addition, in the start opening switch passing process, even if the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value in S1222, the second start winning designation is specified because the second start opening switch 14a was in the ON state in S1221. The command may be controlled to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 .

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data constituting pending information in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). At this time, if there is no pending storage data in both pending storage buffers, a process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53). The special symbol pointer is a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol. If there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer (S54). By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 8b based on the data of the second reserved storage is Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the number of reserved memories=1 in the reserved memory buffer corresponding to the setting of the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number stored in the save area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer is read and the random number of RAM 55 is read out. Store in buffer. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer is read out and stored in the RAM 55. store in random number buffer. Then, the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S56). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer are shifted. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the saving area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased. Thereby, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", it is stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 store each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM55 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1.

Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number specifying command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S59). For example, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. On the other hand, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to transmit the second reserve storage number designation command. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed, and the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol. can be standardized.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R, which is a hit determination random number, from the random number buffer, and executes a big hit determination module (S61). At this time, the hit determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process and S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the reservation storage buffer and the random number buffer is read out, and the big hit is determined. The big hit judging module is a program that compares a predetermined hit judging value with a random number for judging a hit, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing a process of judging a big hit or a process of judging a small hit. When a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol if it coincides with one of the big hit determination values set by the first special symbol winning determination table. be done. When a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, if it matches with any of the big hit determination values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. be done.

When it is determined to be a big hit in S60, a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C) is selected (S73). When the special symbol pointer is not "first", corresponding to the case of "second", the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(D) is selected (S74). After that, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type is determined as a jackpot type corresponding to a value coinciding with the value of random 1 which is the random number for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. (S75).

If it does not coincide with any of the big hit determination values in S61, the big hit determination target is the second special symbol by confirming whether or not the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second", the process proceeds to S82 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer in S76, small hit determination processing is performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (S77). At this time, if the random R which becomes the read hit determination random number matches any of the small hit determination values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is determined to be a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. be.

When it is determined to be a small hit in S77, a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78). Subsequently, the small-hit via-big-hit type determination table of FIG. 5(E) is selected (S79). After that, the hit type corresponding to the value of random 1 which is the hit type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of the small hit via big hit (S80). If it is determined in S77 that it is not to be a small hit, the process proceeds to S82. Data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in a jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81).

Next, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S82). For example, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing design, is set as the stop design of the special design. When the small-hit flag is set, one of the small-hit symbols corresponding to the winning type selected and determined in S80 is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbols. If the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols corresponding to the winning type selected and determined in S75 is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S83).

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. (S131). For example, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. In addition, a design determination designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). The symbol determination designation command set at this time is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the effect control command control process of S28 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (S133).

When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag (S134). A time saving flag is a flag set when it is controlled to a special state including a time saving state. In addition, even when it is controlled to a special state that does not include the time saving state, the time saving flag may be set. Or when it is controlled by the special state which does not include a time saving state, the high base flag etc. which are different from a time saving flag may be set. Thus, a high base flag indicating whether or not high base control is to be performed may be used instead of the time saving flag. After that, settings are made for transmitting a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). The jackpot start designation command includes, for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command corresponding to the jackpot by the variable display of the first special symbol and a jackpot start 2 designation command corresponding to the jackpot by the variable display of the second special symbol. Just do it. Furthermore, the jackpot start 1 designation command may include a plurality of types of commands in which different values are set depending on which one of the first special figure jackpot A to the first special figure jackpot C the hit type is. .

Following S135, a value corresponding to the big win display time is set in the big winning hole control timer (S136). The jackpot display time may be a time for notifying, for example, the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred. In S305 shown in FIG. 7, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1 for each timer interrupt, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole or V big winning hole is opened and the round is started. . Then, the opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S137). The jackpot type is specified by the data indicating the hit type stored in the RAM 55 . The opening mode of the big winning opening and the V big winning opening in the round of the big winning game state is determined by referring to the opening pattern data corresponding to the big winning type among the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54. The number of times, the upper limit of the open time, the upper limit of the winning ball count, the interval time between rounds, etc. can be set partially or entirely differently for each jackpot type. In this way, as for the opening mode in the round of the jackpot game state, a plurality of modes are prepared for each jackpot type with respect to the winning opening to be opened and the number of times of opening. Data indicating the mode of opening the jackpot is set in a predetermined storage area. For example, data on the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S138) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the big winning opening pre-opening process.

When the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set, the small hit opening mode is set (S140). At this time, the small hit open control timer used for the small hit open control is set to be the timer initial value. By referring to the small-hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the small-hit opening mode can set the number of times of opening, the opening time, and the interval time serving as the opening interval. Data indicating a small hit open mode is set in a specific storage area. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to small hit opening pre-processing.

If the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is checked whether or not the time saving flag is set (S142). When the time saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to S152. When the time saving flag is set, the total time saving number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S143). The total number of time saving counter is a counting means for counting the total value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol in the special state including the time saving state. The total time saving number counter is set to a count initial value corresponding to the type of hit in the jackpot ending process of FIG. 11 . Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol based on whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" (S145). When it is time to end the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148. When it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 time reduction number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 time saving number counter is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the special state including the time saving state after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 time saving number counter is set with a count initial value corresponding to the type of hit in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 11 . After that, it is checked whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). When the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter becomes "0", the process proceeds to S149 in order to end the special state. When the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is not "0", proceed to S148 and check whether the count value of the total time saving number counter updated by subtraction in S143 has become "0". When the count value of the total time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152. When the count value of the total time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149. In S149, the time saving flag that has been set is reset. Then, the time saving number counter that has been set is reset (S150). In addition, the setting for transmitting the normal state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151). In addition, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the upper limit number of variable display that can be executed in the special state is set, using only the total time reduction counter, the special symbol The processing related to the 2:00 reduction counter may not be executed.

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big winning opening control timer that was set before the jackpot ending process was executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed (S162). If it has not passed, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has passed, the counter setting corresponding to the hit type is performed (S163). Here, the count initial value of the total time reduction number counter is set according to the control state after the hit for each hit type shown in FIG. For example, if the hit type is either the 1st special figure jackpot A, the 2nd special figure jackpot, or the small hit via jackpot X, the data indicating "100" is the initial count value of the total time reduction counter. set. In addition, if the hit type is either the first special figure jackpot B, the jackpot Y via the jackpot, or the jackpot Z via the jackpot, the data indicating "15" is set as the initial count value of the total time reduction counter. set. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, data indicating "3" is set as the count initial value of the total time saving number counter.

Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a special state specifying command corresponding to the winning type to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S164). For example, if the hit type is any one of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the small hit via jackpot X, a special state that can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 100 times. , a first special state designation command is transmitted. Further, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure jackpot B, the jackpot Y via the small jackpot, and the jackpot Z via the jackpot, the special state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 15 times. , a second special state designation command is transmitted. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, a third special status designation command is transmitted corresponding to the special status that can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed three times. At this time, a time saving flag is set (S165). Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S166), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small win opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that a small-hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Also, the CPU 56 sets a V-judgment winning number counter (S413). The V determination winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of winnings to the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 in the open state of the small hit. For example, "10" is set as the count initial value of the V-judgment prize winning number counter, and initial setting for down-counting the number of prizes to the V judgment prize-winning device 87 is performed. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open process (S309) (S413).

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 56 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" as a count initial value in the small hit opening preprocessing of FIG. 12, and when 10 winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0", the process proceeds to S441. When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is not "0", it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432). When the small hit open control timer times out, it advances to S441. When the small hit opening control timer has not timed out, based on the opening mode of the small hit, the movable part 872 is operated in the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit opening control timer, A process for opening and closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

After that, the V winning switch 87a is turned on in order to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 is detected. It is determined whether or not the state is established (S434). If it is on at this time, the V winning flag is set in response to the detection of the V winning (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of the V winning ball. Subsequently, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning area 870 of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 wins a V prize, the V winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball entering inside the V judgment winning device 87 , are all guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b.

If it is not turned on at S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is turned on (S438). At this time, if it is not in the ON state, the process is terminated, and if it is in the ON state, the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is decremented by "-1" (S439). Also, a process for transmitting a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is performed (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of game balls that have entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, and can also recognize the number of game balls that have entered inside the V judgment prize winning device 87. becomes possible.

When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0", the opening end condition of the small win is established by the fact that the number of winning prizes to the V determination winning device 87 reaches the upper limit value in the small winning game state. It is time. Further, when the small hit open control timer times out, it is the time when the open end condition of the small hit is satisfied due to the end of the open control of the small hit. At these times, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (SS441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (SS442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end processing ( S310) is updated (SS443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, the game ball can be detected even when the game ball passes through the V winning area 870 later than the normal passing time. can be done. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if someone illegally attempts to win a prize in the V prize area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the process after finishing the small hit, the CPU 56 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442). When the V winning valid period timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag has already been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not in the ON state here, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is on, it means that the V winning is detected during the V winning effective period, and the V winning flag indicating the detection of the V winning is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448).

If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win will be made, and the big win flag is set (S449). Also, the data indicating the hit type of the big hit via the small hit is stored in the big hit type buffer (S450). The data indicating the hit type of the small hit via big hit may be stored in the big hit temporary type buffer by S81 in the special symbol normal process of FIG. At S450, in response to the determination of the official jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize, the data indicating the hit type of the jackpot via small hit is formally stored in the jackpot type buffer. At this time, the time saving flag is reset (S451). Subsequently, a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted (S452). The jackpot start designation command may include, for example, a jackpot start 3 designation command corresponding to the jackpot via the small hit. The jackpot start 3 designation command may include a plurality of types of commands in which different values are set according to which of the jackpot X through the small hit to the jackpot Z through the small hit is the hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the start of the jackpot game state by the jackpot start designation command. Also, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453). In addition, the opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S454). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S455) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V prize flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state does not occur, so the stored data of the jackpot type is erased (S456), and the value of the special pattern process flag corresponds to the special pattern normal process (S300). (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. When power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

Effect control processing includes command analysis processing (S704), effect control process processing (S705), random number update processing (S706), and pending storage display control processing (S707). In the command analysis process, the received effect control command is analyzed, and a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is set. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103 . Also, when a display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103 . In addition, when various production control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set.

In the performance control process processing, according to the content of the performance control command analyzed in the command analysis processing, performance control is executed for performing various performances such as performances corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols by the performance display device 9 or the like. In the effect control process process, the effect control process flag is updated according to the current control state, and the process corresponding to the effect control process flag is selected from among the processes according to the control state. In the random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers, such as random numbers for selecting and determining various effects, is updated. In the pending storage display control process, control is performed to update the pending display image displayed on the effect display device 9 when a predetermined display update condition is satisfied.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hitting promotion effect process (S500) and the look-ahead process (S501), and then performs any one of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. conduct. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed. The control related to the effect synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the control related to the effect synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed in one common effect control process. In the effect control process, in a mode that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, control related to the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols is also executed.

In the hitting promotion effect process (S500), the game state is confirmed based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. According to the gaming state confirmed at this time, a hitting promotion effect is executed. The ball-hitting promotion effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball is promoted to hit at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7 . For example, the hit-ball promotion effect includes a right-hand hitting promotion notification effect for notifying that the game ball is promoted to be hit into the second path (right-hand hitting path). The hit ball promotion effect may include the right-hand hitting promotion notification effect and the left-hand hitting promotion notification effect for notifying to promote the hitting of the game ball into the first path (left-hand hitting path). For example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, the effect of the right-handed promotion notification is to continuously display a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by As the hitting ball promotion performance, the hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the second path (right hitting path) is promoted based on the state in which the right hitting promotion notification is executed, and after the right hitting promotion notification is completed. In a predetermined period, by executing the left-handed promotion notification, the hitting (left-handed) of the game ball to the first path (left-handed path) may be promoted. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left-handed promotion notification may be ended.

In the look-ahead process (S501), the hold display information corresponding to the hold information held by the game control microcomputer 560 is stored, and the hold display information can be used for the look-ahead effect. In the look-ahead performance, before the turn of variable display of special symbols based on certain suspension information arrives, the reservation display information is read ahead to determine the contents of the variable display of special symbols based on the corresponding suspension information, To make it possible to suggest how the future variable display of special symbols will be by a notice or the like at an earlier stage. The hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is also referred to as target hold information. Further, the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is also called target variation.

In the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800), it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. For example, it checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. In the performance symbol variation start process (S801), control is performed so that the performance at the time of variation, which is the performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, a performance pattern for performance at the time of variation is selected, and time measurement of a performance time timer for measuring performance time to be executed is started. In the effect pattern changing process (S802), the switching timing of each state constituting the effect pattern is controlled, and it is monitored whether or not the effect time measured by the effect time timer has expired. In the production pattern variation stop processing (S803), the production time is ended or based on the receipt of the design confirmation designation command, the production at the time of fluctuation is ended, and the fixed special pattern that is the result of the fluctuation display of the special pattern is displayed. Control is performed to display the corresponding effect result.

In the big-hit display process (S804), display control such as fanfare effect control is performed when a big-hit occurs. The fanfare performance when a big win occurs includes a big win display for notifying the occurrence of a big win on the performance display device 9. - 特許庁In the round process (S805), display control during the big hit round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is met, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S807). In round post-processing (S806), display control between big hit rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is established, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round process (S805). In the big-hit end effect processing (S807), the effect display device 9 performs display control for informing the player that the big-hit game state has ended.

In the small hit display process (S808), when a small win occurs, display control is performed, such as control to perform a fanfare effect for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). The fanfare effect when a small win occurs includes a small win display for informing the production display device 9 of the occurrence of a small win. In small hit opening processing (S809), various effects control during opening of the V determination winning device 87 is performed in the small hit. In the small hit end effect processing (S810), the effect display device 9 performs effect control for informing the player that the small win game state has ended. In addition, in a small winning game state, V winning of a game ball is detected by a V winning prize switch 87a, and when it is determined that V winning has occurred, V winning presentation control is performed to inform that V winning has occurred. When V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big winning display processing (S804) in order to shift to the big winning game state. On the other hand, when the V prize is not generated in the small winning game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting processing (S800) since the game is not shifted to the big winning game state.

In the production control process, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled by the above-described processes, the production at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the production result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbols is produced. Is displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 101 recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variable display to be executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and performs the effect of the effect at the time of variation. determine the outcome. In addition, in the effect control process processing, the execution status of the effect control process is confirmed by the ball hitting promotion effect processing of S500, and the ball hitting promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

The pachinko game machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of hitting ball promotion effects including high base state right hitting promotion information, small hit right hitting promotion information, and big winning right hitting promotion information. The high-base state right-handed promotion notification is a hitting-ball promotion effect for making the game ball aim to enter the gate 32 and the second starting prize-winning port 14 of the variable prize-winning device 15 by hitting right in the high base state. The small-hit right-handed promotion notification is a hitting-ball promotion presentation for making the game ball aim to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 by hitting rightward in the small-hit game state. The big-hit right-handed promotion notification is a hit-ball promotion for making a right-handed hit in the big-hit game state to aim for the game ball to enter the big-hit opening of the big-hit variable winning ball device 20 or the V big winning opening of the V-judgment winning device 87. It is a performance.

The high-base state right-handed promotion notification, the small-hit right-handed promotion notification, and the big-hit right-handed promotion notification include a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. It may be performed using the same image that is continuously displayed. In other words, even if it is displayed in a state in which it is impossible to specify which type of right-handed promotional notification corresponds to the promotional notification in the high base state, the promotional notification for the small win, or the promotional notification for the big win. good. Right-handed promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. different images depending on the game control state, such as a yellow image for the small hit right-hand promotion notification and a red image for the big hit right-hand promotion notice. good too. The size of the image used for the effect may be changed according to the type of the hitting promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the effect may be changed according to the degree of advantage for the player. As an example, a small-sized image is used for the small-hit right-handed promotion notification, a medium-sized image is used for the high-base-right-handed promotion notification, and a large-sized image is used for the big-hit right-handed promotion notification. You may make it promote alerting|reporting using the image of. As for the high-base state right-handed promotion notification, a large-sized image may be used for the promotional notice, as in the big-hit right-handed promotion notice.

As the pachinko game machine 1, an enclosed type game machine may be employed in which game media are enclosed and game points (scores) are added without paying out the game media to the player according to the occurrence of winning. The enclosed type game machine is formed with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, within the game machine, and is also provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of winning. A gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of a prize has been described, but the game medium is enclosed, and a game point ( An enclosed type game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed type game machine is formed with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, within the game machine, and is also provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of winning.

Expressions for comparison of various ratios such as execution ratios of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”. For example, within the range of 0% to 100%, values including 0%, values including 100%, and values excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

As the means for detecting the action of the player, detection means capable of directly detecting the action of the player, such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor, may be used.

FIG. 17-1 shows a screen display configuration example AKP0 in the effect display device 9. FIG. In the configuration example AKP0, the screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, a small symbol display area 9K, and a right-handed display area 9Z. The effect symbol display area 9L is a "left" symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol to be the left symbol. The effect symbol display area 9C is a "medium" symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol to be a medium symbol. The effect symbol display area 9R is a "right" symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol to be the right symbol.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the effect display device 9, a small pattern display area 9K is arranged. The small symbol display area 9K is smaller than the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the upper right portion of the screen of the effect display device 9, for example. In the small symbol display area 9K, variable display of small symbols is executed corresponding to variable display of special symbols and performance symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the effect pattern, and is capable of performing variable display in a mode in which part or all of the identification information image showing the effect pattern is common. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the production pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing the small pattern has the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the production picture. Since it is an image showing the corresponding number and does not include a part showing the character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the identification information image showing the effect pattern. In the small pattern display area 9K provided on the screen of the effect display device 9, variable display of the small patterns that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and fixed small patterns that are the display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

In response to the variable display of the special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the performance symbols and the small symbols is executed. After that, when a fixed special pattern is derived as a result of variable display of special patterns, a final stop pattern is derived as a result of variable display of production patterns, and a final stop pattern is derived as a result of variable display of small patterns. A fixed small pattern is derived. Thus, deriving various display patterns such as special patterns, effect patterns, and small patterns means stopping and displaying the display patterns as identification information by a complete stop or a final stop to end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the production pattern to the derivation of the fixed production pattern as a result of the variable display, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0" and the production pattern is changed. It may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking, stretching, or the like. Such a display state of the production design is also called a stop display due to temporary stop of the production design, and although the display result in the variable display of the production design is not definitely displayed, the fluctuation of the production design due to the scroll display or the update display is possible. The player can recognize that the game is not progressing. In addition, in the stop display by temporarily stopping the production pattern, the production pattern is completely stopped and displayed in a period shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion and contraction. may be included. As for the small symbols, it is sufficient if it is possible to perform a stop display by a temporary stop similar to the performance symbols.

FIG. 17-2 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a start-up winning command. In the starting opening switch passage processing (S311) in the special symbol process processing, as the starting opening winning command, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start winning designation command or the second start winning designation command, the first reserved memory number designation A setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to the occurrence of the starting winning prize, such as a command or a second reserved memory number command, is performed. FIG. 17-2(A) shows a setting example regarding these start-up winning commands. FIG. 17-2(B) shows a setting example of the symbol specifying command included in the start-up winning command.

The command A401H, which is the first start winning designation command, and the command A402H, which is the second starting winning designation command, are included in the start winning designation command that designates the occurrence of the start winning prize. Note that the suffix H indicates a hexadecimal number. The command C0XXH, which is the first reserved storage number designation command, and the command C1XXH, which is the second reserved storage number designation command, are included in the reserved storage number designation command for designating the reserved storage number. In addition, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the reserved storage number designation command, different EXT data (for example, one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The symbol designation command is a command C2XXH in which different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 06H) is set according to the display result and the result of pre-reading determination regarding the hit type. The variation type command is a command C3XXH in which different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern type and the result of pre-reading determination regarding the variation pattern.

Command C201H and command C202H among the symbol specifying commands can be transmitted when the value of random R, which is a random number for winning determination, matches the value for judging a big hit, and it is determined that a big win will occur by the variable display of special symbols. By doing so, the judgment result at the time of winning is notified that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Commands C203H to C205H among the symbol designation commands can be transmitted when the value of random R, which is a random number for determining a hit, matches the value for determining a small hit, and it is determined that a small hit will occur due to the variable display of special symbols. By being controlled to a small winning game state, the judgment result at the time of winning is notified. In addition, the commands C203H to C205H notify that the hit type is any one of the small hit via the big hit X to the small hit via the big hit Z according to the value of the random 1 which is the random number for the hit type determination. Among the symbol designation commands, the command C206H can be transmitted when the value of random R, which is a random number for winning determination, does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value, and the special symbol fluctuation display When it is determined that a small win will not occur, the determination result at the time of winning is notified that control is not made to the big win game state or the small win game state. In this way, the symbol designation command uses random R as a random number for judging a hit and random 1 as a random number for judging a hit type, which are read out at the time of starting winning, so that the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". It is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning, such as whether or not it is determined to be a "hit" and the type of hit when the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be a "small hit". When the variable display result of the special symbols is not determined as "big hit" or "minor hit", it is also said that the variable display result of the special symbols is "loss". When the variable display result of the special symbols is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit", it is also said that the variable display result of the special symbols is "hit".

FIG. 17-3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern. A plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. 17-3 are different in variable display mode of special figure variation time and production design. The special symbol fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation to the derivation of the fixed special symbol as a variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol. The plurality of variation patterns include variation patterns corresponding to either "loss" or "hit" as a result of variable display of special symbols. The variation pattern corresponding to the "hit" may correspond to both the special symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the small jackpot. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the "hit" is a variation pattern that corresponds only to the special design jackpot and does not correspond to the jackpot via the small hit, a variation pattern that corresponds only to the jackpot via the small hit and does not correspond to the special design jackpot, and a special design. It may include part or all of the variation patterns corresponding to both the big win and the big win via the small win.

FIG. 17-4 shows an example of determination of variation patterns according to game states and the like. In the pachinko game machine 1, the normal state, the case where the remaining number of fluctuation display in the special state is 3 or more, the case where the remaining number of fluctuation display in the special state is 1 or 2, and the fluctuation in the special state The setting of the determinable pattern is made different between the case of the final variation in which the remaining number of times of display is 0 and the case of the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. The remaining number of times of variable display in the special state is the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the special state. The variation pattern is determined when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the remaining number of variable displays in the special state can be specified as the number of variable displays remaining after the start of this variable display. Just do it. For example, in the determinable pattern corresponding to the final variation, which is the final variation display in the special state, the remaining variation display count becomes 0 after the start of the current variation display. A determinable pattern is set when the remaining number of displays is zero. As for the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, when each variable display is executed, the special state is ended and the game state is the normal state. However, for the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, a special variation pattern can be determined, unlike the variation display in other normal states. Therefore, the setting of the determinable pattern is different between the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state and the variable display in another normal state. In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-4, when the variable display result is "hit", the hit type is one of the first special jackpot A to the first special jackpot C or the second special jackpot. The case where the display result of the special pattern is "big win" and the case where the display result of the special pattern whose win type is any one of the jackpot X through small win to the big win Z through small win are included are "small win". there is

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (A), in the determination example AKE01 in the case of the normal state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 . . . PA2-3, PB2-1 through PB2-4 are included in the determinable patterns. When the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the normal state where the high base control and the electric chewing support control are not performed, it is also called "normal failure". In the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, the mode of variable display of the performance symbols does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the performance symbols, the fixed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are displayed non-reach. included in the variation pattern. The display result in the case of the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination is also called non-reach loss. In the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-4, after the aspect of the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the production pattern is a predetermined reach that is not a winning combination. The fixed effect pattern of the combination is included in the reach variation pattern that is stop-displayed. The display result when the ready-to-win combinations are decided production patterns is also called reach-losing. A reach combination is also called a reach loss combination. The ready-to-win mode is a mode in which variable display continues for performance symbols that have not yet been stop-displayed when the performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the variable display constitute a part of the jackpot combination. . For example, in the ready-to-win mode, the same effect symbols are stop-displayed as the left symbol and the right symbol. It is also said that reach is established when it becomes a reach mode in the variable display of the production pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. A non-reach combination and a reach combination are collectively called a losing combination.

In the variable display of the performance drawing by the variation pattern PA1-4, the performance design is temporarily stopped during the variable display and then the variable display is resumed, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo-continuous effect that looks like this is executed. The variable display resumed after temporarily stopping the production pattern is also referred to as pseudo-continuous variation. In the variable display of the effect pattern by the variation pattern PA1-4, the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination is stop-displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Even in the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA2-2 and the variation pattern PB2-2, the pseudo continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PB2-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PB2-4, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times. In the variable display of the performance symbols by any of the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2 to PB2-4, after the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous performance is executed once or a plurality of times, the performance symbols are displayed. The mode of variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode, and finally, the fixed effect symbols of the ready-to-win losing combination are stopped and displayed.

In the determination example AKE01, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "win", the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the determinable patterns. In the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4, after the aspect of the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the production pattern, the fixed production pattern of the winning combination is displayed. is included in the hit variation pattern that is displayed as a stop. The hit variation pattern can be used as a big hit variation pattern when the display result of the special symbols is a "big win" or as a small hit variation pattern when the display result of the special symbols is a "small hit". The fixed effect pattern of the winning combination is a mode of the display result in which the same effect patterns as the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are stopped and displayed. In the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, performance symbols representing numbers 1 to 9, for example, are variably displayed as left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols, respectively. In addition, the production pattern showing the number 7 includes a production pattern showing the number 7 with a red display color and a production pattern showing the number 7 with a gold color. The effect pattern showing the number 7 in red is also called a red 7 effect pattern. The effect pattern showing the number 7 in gold color is also called a gold 7 effect pattern.

As for the fixed effect symbol of the winning combination, for example, different effect symbols may be determined according to the winning type. As an example, if the hit type is any one of the first special big win A, the second special big win, and the big win X via the small win, the production pattern of gold 7 can be determined as the confirmed production pattern of the winning combination. . In addition, when the winning type is any one of the first special figure big winning B, the big winning Y via the small winning, and the big winning Z via the small winning, the performance pattern of red 7 can be determined as the determined performance pattern of the winning combination. When the winning type is the first special figure jackpot C, any one of the performance symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 can be determined as the determined performance symbols of the winning combination. In addition, as a display result in the variable display of the production pattern, even if the fixed production pattern of the winning combination using any of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is derived, then promotion By executing the effect, it may be notified that it is another winning type.

If the hit type is any one of the first special symbol jackpot A, the second special symbol jackpot, and the jackpot X via the minor hit, the post-hit control state is a special symbol until the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches 100 times. state can be controlled. If the hit type is any one of the first special figure jackpot B, the jackpot Y via the jackpot, and the jackpot Z via the jackpot, as a post-win control state, until the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches 15 times, the special state can be controlled. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, as a post-hit control state, the special symbol can be controlled to a special state until the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols reaches three times. In this way, as a display result in the variable display of the production patterns, the number of red 7 is higher than the case where the fixed production pattern of the winning combination using any of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is derived. When a fixed performance symbol of a winning combination using the performance symbols is derived, a big win advantageous to the player can occur in terms of post-hit control state and the like. As a display result in the variable display of the production pattern, the case where the fixed production pattern of the hit combination using any of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is derived, or the production pattern of red 7 is used. A big win that is more advantageous to a player in terms of a post-hit control state or the like when the fixed performance pattern of the winning combination using the performance pattern of gold 7 is derived than when the fixed performance pattern of the winning combination is derived. can occur.

A ready-to-win performance is executed in response to a ready-to-win state during variable display of performance symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win effects are executed in which the ratio of the variable display results to "hit" differs according to the effect mode. The ratio of the variable display results to be "hit" is also referred to as "hit reliability" or "hit expectation". The ready-to-win effects include, for example, normal ready-to-win and super ready-to-win with a higher expectation of winning than normal ready-to-win. As for the variation pattern in the determination example AKE01, when the variable display result is "losing", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of pending memories and the degree of expectation for winning, and the variable display result is "hit". In some cases, a variation pattern is determined as a usage pattern at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of winning. For example, when the number of reserved memories is large, than when the number of reserved memories is small, a non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time may be determined as the usage pattern at a high rate. When the variable display result is "hit", a variation pattern with a higher rate of pseudo-continuous variation execution times than when the variable display result is "loss" may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is “hit”, the variation pattern may be determined to execute the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win at a higher rate than when the variable display result is “losing”.

As shown in FIG. 17-4(B), in the determination example AKE02 when the remaining number of times of variable display in the special state is 3 or more, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation pattern PB1- 1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-4 are included in the determinable patterns. The fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3 are included in the non-reach fluctuation patterns. When the remaining number of times of variation display in the special state is 3 or more, the variation display of the special design is performed by determining the variation pattern with the shorter special figure variation time as the usage pattern at a higher rate than in the normal state. It suffices if it is possible to perform time-saving control in which time is shortened. In the special state, for example, a first special period such as a period in which the remaining number of times of variable display is 3 or more and a second special period such as a period in which the remaining number of times of variable display is less than 3 are used to display special symbols. The presence or absence of time saving control for shortening the variable display time may be varied. In this case, presence/absence of time-saving control is set so that time-saving control is performed during the first special period when the special state exists, and time-saving control is not performed during the second special period when the special state exists. In a special state in which time-saving control is performed along with high-base control and electric chew support control, if the variable display result is "loss", it is also called time-saving medium loss. In decision example AKE02, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol is "hit", similar to decision example AKE01, variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the determinable patterns. is As for the variation pattern in the determination example AKE02, when the variable display result is "losing", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of pending memories and the degree of expectation for winning, and the variable display result is "hit". In some cases, a variation pattern is determined as a usage pattern at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of winning.

As shown in FIG. 17-4(C), in the determination example AKE03 when the remaining number of variable display in the special state is 1 or 2, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation pattern PC1 -1, PC1-2 are included in the determinable pattern. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PC1-1 and the variation pattern PC1-2, pseudo continuous performance may be executed. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PC1-1 and the variation pattern PC1-2, the ready-to-win mode may or may not be the ready-to-win mode. In the determination example AKE03, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2 are included in the determinable patterns. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2, after executing the variable display and the ready-to-win performance that are partly common to the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2, a hit is performed. A combination of fixed effect symbols may be stopped and displayed. The variation pattern in the determination example AKE03 may be determined as a usage pattern at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of winning. For example, when the variable display result is "no", the variation pattern PC1-1 may be determined as the usage pattern at a higher rate than the variation pattern PC1-2. When the variable display result is "hit", the variation pattern PC3-2 may be determined as the usage pattern at a higher rate than the variation pattern PC3-1.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (D), in the determination example AKE04 in the case of the final variation in which the remaining number of variable display in the special state is 0, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation Only the pattern PC1-3 becomes a determinable pattern, and only the variation pattern PC3-3 becomes a determinable pattern if the variable display result of the special symbol is "win". As shown in FIG. 17-3, the variation pattern PC1-3 and the variation pattern PC3-3 are both variation patterns with a special figure variation time of 140000 ms (milliseconds). Therefore, the final variation, which is the final variation display in the special state, has the same special figure variation time depending on whether the variable display result is "loss" or "hit".

As shown in FIG. 17-4(E), in the determination example AKE05 in the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol is "lost", Only the variation pattern PD1-1 becomes a determinable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "win", the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the determinable pattern. As shown in FIG. 17-3, the variation pattern PD1-1 is a variation pattern with an extremely short variation display time, such as a special figure variation time of 500 ms. Therefore, the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the special state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "lost", by repeating the start and end within a short period of time, the second pending memory is digested. Further, when the result of the variable display of the special symbols is "hit", the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state has a shorter special symbol variable time than the variable display in other game states. Since it is likely to become, the fixed performance pattern of the winning combination is likely to be derived within a short period of time.

The special state final variation is the final variation that is the final variation display in the special state. During the execution of the variable display as the final variation of the special state, the performance corresponding to the loss or the performance corresponding to the hit is executed after the performance of the acquisition, the performance of increasing the degree of expectation, and the advance notice performance of one time or a plurality of times. The acquisition effect is a preliminary effect of displaying the specific images of the display number related to the storage number of the reservation information to be the second reservation memory. The specific image may be, for example, a panel-shaped effect image showing a character selected from among a plurality of types of characters. The expectation-increasing effect is a change effect in which the display mode of the specific image can be changed in accordance with the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing through the second start winning hole 14 . However, when the expectation level increasing effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the specific image changes and cases where the display mode of the specific image does not change. The one-time or multiple-time advance notice effect is a specific effect related to the specific image displayed in the obtained effect. The loss corresponding performance is a loss notification performance for notifying that the display result of the special symbol becomes a loss symbol and that a big hit or a small hit will not occur. The hit-corresponding production is a winning notification production for notifying that the special pattern is displayed as a big-hit pattern or a small-hit pattern, and that a big-hit or a small-hit will occur. The loss corresponding performance and the hit corresponding performance are collectively referred to as a display result corresponding performance. Acquisition effect, expectation increase effect, notice effect, loss corresponding effect, and display result corresponding effect including hit corresponding effect are all included in the final change effect that can be executed in response to the special state final change.

The final variation effect may include display of a background image by playing back a moving image or displaying an animation of a still image. The display of the background image included in the final variation effect may be controlled so as to be able to continue until the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage is completed even after the special state final variation is completed. For example, the loss-corresponding effect and the winning-corresponding effect include reproduction display of a moving image or animation display of a still image in the display of the background image, and even after the final change in the special state is completed, the change display corresponding to the second reserved memory. will continue to run until it finishes. As a result, the variable display as the special state final variation and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory give the player the impression that they are a series of consistent variable displays, and the game for each variable display is performed. Appropriate display effect that raises the interest of the person becomes possible.

In the acquisition effect, for example, the maximum display in relation to one change display that is the final change in the special state and four change displays corresponding to the upper limit value of the number of retention information stored as the second retention memory It suffices if the specific image with the number of 5 can be displayed. When the execution of the acquisition effect is started, if the number of storage of the reservation information serving as the second reservation memory reaches the upper limit of 4, a plurality of types of specific images are displayed as five specific images corresponding to the maximum display number. It is sufficient that a panel-like effect image showing a character selected from among the characters can be displayed. A panel-shaped effect image showing a character that can be displayed in the obtained effect is also called a character panel image. The number of character panel images to be displayed in the acquisition effect may be determined based on the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of storage of the reservation information serving as the second reservation storage. The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of retention information stored as the second retention memory is the value obtained by adding 1, which is the number of times the variation display is performed as the final variation in the special state, to the number of times the variation display is performed by the second retention storage. is.

In the advance notice effect, as the effect related to the specific image displayed in the acquisition effect, it is sufficient if the battle effect using the character shown in the character panel image can be executed. In the battle production, for example, the character shown in the character panel image can be used as an ally character, and a moving image can be reproduced or a still image can be displayed as an animation so that the character fights against an enemy character that is different from the ally character. I wish I had. In the one-time or multiple-time notice effect, for example, in each notice effect, a scene in which a friendly character loses a battle with an enemy character is displayed, so that the display result of the special pattern becomes a lost pattern, and a big hit or a small win. It is possible to suggest that a hit will not occur. On the other hand, in the announcement effect of each time, for example, by displaying a scene in which a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the display result of the special pattern becomes a big win pattern or a small win pattern, and a big win or a small win is displayed. It is possible to suggest that it occurs. In this way, the advance notice effect of each time may suggest that a big win or a small win will occur, or suggest that a big win or a small win will not occur, depending on the effect mode such as the display mode of the effect image. There is Suggestion that a big hit or a small hit will not occur due to the effect mode of the advance notice effect is also referred to as a loss suggestion. The advance notice effect of the effect mode suggesting a loss is also called a loss notice. Suggestion that a big hit or a small hit will occur due to the effect mode of the advance notice effect is also called a hit suggestion. The advance notice effect of the effect mode that suggests a win is also referred to as a win notice.

The number of specific images displayed in the acquisition effect, which is the preliminary effect, and the number of executions until the hit suggestion is made in the advance effect, are not necessarily the number of retention information stored as the second retention memory, and the display result of the special symbol is the big hit symbol. Alternatively, it does not have to be the same as the number of executions up to the variation display that becomes a small winning symbol. For example, when the execution of the acquisition effect is started, even if the number of storage of the reservation information to be the second reservation storage does not reach the upper limit of 4, five specific images corresponding to the maximum number of display, Up to five character panel images, which are panel-shaped effect images, may be displayed. Further, for example, even if a scene in which a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character is displayed in the second notice effect, and the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit is suggested, the reserved information becomes the second reserved memory. Among them, the display result of the special design based on the second and subsequent reserved information may be a big hit design or a small hit design.

On the other hand, the display number and display mode of the specific images in the obtained effect, which is the preliminary effect, are related to the number of executions and the effect mode of the announcement effect. For example, the number of display of character panel images, which are specific images in the acquisition effect, is determined to be equal to or greater than the number of executions of the notice effect, and never less than the number of times of execution of the notice effect. When five character panel images corresponding to the maximum display number are displayed, the first character panel image can suggest an ally character in the first notice effect, and the second character panel image The panel image can suggest the ally character in the second notice effect, the third character panel image can suggest the ally character in the third notice effect, and the fourth character panel image can suggest the fourth notice effect. It is possible to suggest the teammate character in the advance notice effect, and the fifth character panel image can suggest the friend character in the fifth advance notice effect.

FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 show execution periods and execution timings of various effects corresponding to the final variation in the special state. Of these, FIG. 17-5 shows that in both the final variation in the special state and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to 4, which is the upper limit value of the second hold memory number, the display result of the special design is a lost design. Execution periods and execution timings of various effects including five advance notice effects are shown in relation to the case of "losing". FIG. 17-6 shows that in the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display based on the holding information corresponding to the second holding memory numbers 1 and 2, the display result of the special design is a losing design in both cases. There is, in the variable display based on the reserved information corresponding to the second reserved memory number 3, in relation to the case of "hit" that the display result of the special pattern is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern, two advance notice effects are performed. It shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects including. In the hold information stored as the second hold memory, the hold information corresponding to the variable display of the "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is a big win symbol or a small win symbol is also called specific hold information.

For example, based on the fact that the hit type is determined to be the first special symbol jackpot C, the display result of the first special symbol becomes "jackpot", thereby controlling the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, special When controlled to state, three variable displays are enabled in the special state. Then, the variable displays corresponding to the remaining number of times of 2 and 1 are executed, respectively, and when the display result of each of the variable displays becomes "loss", the variable display of the special state final change is started at timing AKT01. In the variable display of the production pattern and the small pattern, the all pattern variation in which the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern all fluctuate is started with the start of the special state final variation. It should be noted that, corresponding to the start of the special state final variation, the production design may be in a non-display state, so that the production design is not displayed. After that, at timing AKT02, execution of the acquisition effect is started, and the number of displayed characters indicated by the panel-like effect image serving as the specific image may be increased according to the elapsed time. When the timing AKT03 is reached, execution of the acquisition effect is finished, execution of the expectation level increasing effect is started, and the display mode of the panel-like effect image serving as the specific image can be changed. In the expectation-increasing effect, when the game ball that has entered the second start winning hole 14 is detected, the display mode of the specific image may or may not change. When the display mode of the specific image is changed by the expectation level-increasing effect, the expectation level for winning is increased. Then, at timing AKT04, the execution of the expectation-increasing effect ends.

Next, at timing AKT11, execution of the announcement effect is started. In the case shown in FIG. 17-5, the advance notice effect is executed each time corresponding to each of the timings AKT11 to AKT15, so that the notice effect is executed five times in total. When five notice performances are executed, the first notice performance can suggest whether the final variation of the special state is a win or a loss, and the second notice performance corresponds to 1 of the second reserved storage number. The variable display can suggest whether it is a win or a loss, the third notice effect can suggest whether the change display corresponding to 2 of the second reserved memory number is a win or a loss, and the fourth notice effect can suggest the second The variable display corresponding to the number of reserved memories of 3 can suggest win or lose, and the fifth advance notice performance can suggest whether the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory number of 4 wins or loses. When the advance notice effects suggesting failure are all executed as the five advance notice effects, it is possible to suggest that all of the fluctuation displays corresponding to the special state final fluctuation and the second reserved memory are failure. However, the number of executions of the advance notice effect and the number of executions of the variable display do not strictly match each other, and it is only necessary that they can be suggested. For example, when one of the variable displays is a win, the number of executions of the notice effect may be less than the number of times of execution of the variable display. In this case, it is possible to suggest that the variable display is a win by an advance notice effect with a smaller number of times of execution than the number of times of execution until the variable display becomes a win. In addition, when all of the variable displays are failures, the number of executions of the notice effect may be greater than the number of times of execution of the variable display. In this way, even when the number of executions of the notice effect and the number of times of execution of the variable display are different, the numbers of executions are likely to be close to each other, so that the player is given an impression that the notice effect and the variable display are related. I wish I could.

After the fifth advance notice effect is completed at the timing AKT16 shown in FIG. 17-5, the loss correspondence effect is executed in response to the execution of the notice effect that suggests the failure. A specific notification for notifying that a big win and a small win are not generated and control is not performed to a big win game state or a small win game state by executing a notice performance suggesting a loss or executing a loss corresponding performance. is executable. After that, for example, when the final stage of the special state final variation is reached, the result display AKR01 at the time of losing is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 . The result display AKR01 at the time of losing may be a display effect that notifies the player of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the small winning game state or the big winning game state until the special state ends so that the player can recognize it. . Then, at timing AKT21, the special state final change ends. Following such special state final variation, variation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage are sequentially executed. In the case shown in FIG. 17-5, in both the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display based on the holding information corresponding to 4, which is the upper limit value of the second holding memory number, the display result of the special pattern is the missing pattern. In the variable display of the small symbols, fixed small symbols of the combination of losing are stopped and displayed corresponding to such "losing". In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage, the variable display result corresponds to "loss", and the variable pattern PD1-1 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. Before long, the start and end of the variable display are repeated, and at timing AKT22, all the variable displays corresponding to the second reserved storage are completed.

In the case shown in FIG. 17-6, the advance notice effect is executed each time corresponding to each of the timings AKT1 and AKT12, so that the advance notice effect is executed twice in total. Of these, in the first notice effect, a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed, and in the second notice effect, a win notice that suggests a win is executed. After the second advance notice effect is completed at timing AKT13 shown in FIG. 17-6, the win corresponding effect is executed in response to the execution of the advance notice effect serving as the win notice. A specification for informing that a big win or a small win occurs by executing a notice performance suggesting a win or by executing a performance corresponding to a win, and that control to a big win game state or a small win game state is possible. Notification can be performed. After that, for example, when the final stage of the special state final variation is reached, on the screen of the effect display device 9, a win-time standby display AKR02 is performed. The win-time standby display AKR02 is waiting for the occurrence of a big win or a small win by, for example, continuing or temporarily stopping the reproduction display of a moving image serving as a background image common to at least a part of the win-corresponding performance. may be displayed as long as it is recognizable by the player. Then, at timing AKT21, the special state final change ends. Following such special state final variation, variation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage are sequentially executed. In the case shown in FIG. 17-6, both the final variation in the special state and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory counts of 1 and 2 correspond to "loss" in which the display result of the special symbol is a lost symbol. Then, in the variable display of the small symbols, the fixed small symbols that are the result of the special display are stopped and displayed. In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory number of 3, in the variable display of the small symbols, in the variable display of the small symbols, the confirmed small symbols of the winning combination correspond to the "win" that the display result of the special symbols is the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol. Stop is displayed. In addition, the variable display result is determined to be either of the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 according to the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. ends and a big or small win occurs.

In the special state final variation, the variation pattern PC1-3 is determined as the use pattern when the display result of the special symbol is "loss", and the variation pattern PC3-3 is determined when the display result of the special symbol is "hit". Determined by usage patterns. In addition, the variation pattern PC1-3, if the display result of the variation display that becomes the special state final variation is "loss", even if all the variation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage are "loss" , even if one of the variable displays is "hit", it is determined as a usage pattern. Further, when the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory is "win", no matter how many times the variable display is "win", the display result of the variable display becomes the special state final change. is "losing", the variation pattern PC1-3 is determined as the usage pattern. Variation pattern PC1-3 and variation pattern PC3-3 are both variation patterns with a special figure variation time of 140000ms. Therefore, when the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display based on the specific reserved information stored as the second reserved memory is the first number of times and the second number of times different from the first number of times, The variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common in the special state final variation. In this way, the change display time in the special state final change becomes constant, so that the effect control for executing various effects included in the final change effect becomes easy, and the data capacity used for the effect control is reduced. be able to.

FIG. 17-7 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process (S705). In the performance symbol variation start process, the performance control CPU 101 determines a final stop symbol of the performance symbols and the like (AKS011). The final stop design of the production design is the final stop design, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31, or the display of the special design specified by the display result specification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as results. The variable display contents corresponding to the display result of the variation pattern or the special symbol may include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "first win" to "third win". For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the non-reach variation pattern among the loss variation patterns, the variable display content becomes "non-reach (loss)". Further, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the reach variation pattern among the loss variation patterns, the variable display content is "reach (loss)". On the other hand, when any one of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the small hit via jackpot X is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command , the variable display content is "first hit". As the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command, when any one of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit is specified, variable The displayed content becomes "Second win". When the hit type of the first special figure jackpot C is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specifying command, the variable display content becomes "third win".

A fixed performance pattern to be a final stop pattern of the performance patterns is determined so as to be a non-matching performance pattern in which the left pattern and the right pattern are different when the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)''. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data to be a random number for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by a random counter or the like for generating a software random number, and prepares a determined left symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 102. , etc., to determine the left confirmed effect symbol to be stop-displayed in the effect symbol display area 9L among the confirmed effect symbols. Next, numerical data to be a random number for determining the right finalized pattern, which is updated by a random counter or the like for generating a software random number, is extracted, and a table for determining the right finalized pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 102 is referred to. Then, the right confirmed effect symbol to be stop-displayed in the effect symbol display area 9R among the confirmed effect symbols may be determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined effect symbol to be different from the symbol number of the left determined effect symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data to be medium-definite pattern determination random numbers updated by a random counter or the like for generating software random numbers are extracted, and a medium-definite pattern determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 102 is referred to. Then, among the confirmed effect symbols, the middle confirmed effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9C may be determined.

A final stop pattern of the performance pattern is determined so that the left pattern and the right pattern are the same and match when the variable display content is ``reach (losing)''. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data to be a random number for determining left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter for generating software random numbers, etc., and prepares a determined right and left symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 102. By referring to , the effect symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in the effect symbol display area 9L and the effect symbol display area 9R among the confirmed effect symbols may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data that will be medium-definite pattern determination random numbers updated by a random counter for generating software random numbers, etc. , among the confirmed effect symbols, the middle confirmed effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9C may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle confirmed effect pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left confirmed effect pattern and the right confirmed effect pattern, when the confirmed effect pattern becomes a winning combination, for example, 1 By adding or subtracting an arbitrary value to or from the pattern number of the medium finalized production pattern, the finalized production pattern is not a hit combination but a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium finalized performance pattern, the pattern difference, which is the difference between the pattern numbers of the left finalized performance pattern and the right finalized performance pattern, may be determined, and the medium finalized performance pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When the variable display content is any one of ``first win'' to ``third win'', the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are the same and match with the final stop pattern of the production pattern. It is determined so as to be a production pattern. For example, when the variable display content is "1st hit", it is sufficient that the determined effect symbol of the winning combination using the effect symbol of Gold 7 can be determined. Further, when the variable display content is "second win", it is sufficient that the determined effect symbol of the winning combination using the red 7 effect symbol can be determined. When the variable display content is "3rd win", the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that will be a random number for determining a winning design that is updated by a random counter for generating a software random number, for example. Subsequently, by referring to a hit fixed pattern determination table prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 102, a fixed effect pattern of a winning combination using any of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is determined. It should be possible to decide.

When the variable display content is any one of ``first win'' to ``third win'', it may be determined whether or not to execute a pattern promotion presentation such as a re-lottery presentation or promotion presentation during a big win. . In the re-lottery performance, the performance symbols of the winning combinations using any of the performance symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 are temporarily displayed while the performance symbols are variablely displayed, so that the winning type is the first. Once it is made possible to recognize that it is a special big win C or a big win Z via a small win, and by re-variation of again variably displaying the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the winning combinations using the performance symbols of gold 7 or red 7 are stopped. By being displayed, it is possible for the player to be recognizably informed that the winning type is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the production pattern is changed again by the re-lottery production, the fixed production pattern of the winning combination using any of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is stopped and displayed. In some cases, it is not notified that the winning type is advantageous to the player. When it is decided to execute the re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed before execution of the re-lottery performance may be determined together with the fixed performance symbols.

After the fixed effect symbols and the like are determined in AKS011, small symbol determination processing is executed (89AKS01). In the small symbol determination process, a fixed small symbol or the like that will be displayed as a result of variable display of small symbols is determined. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a special state final change (89AKS51). Then, in the case of the special state final variation, a start setting for non-displaying of the performance symbols is performed (89AKS52). As a result, along with the execution of the special state final variation, it is possible to execute the variable display of the small symbols as a non-display state in which the effect symbols are not displayed. When the effect symbol non-display is started, for example, by setting the effect symbol non-display flag, it is possible to store that the effect symbol is in the non-display state.

If it is not the special state final variation at 89AKS51, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is variation pattern PD1-1 (89AKS53). At this time, if it is not the variation pattern PD1-1, it is determined whether or not the performance symbols are not displayed (89AKS54). For example, when the performance symbol non-display flag is ON, it is determined that the performance symbol is non-display, and when the performance symbol non-display flag is OFF, it is determined that the performance symbol is not non-display. When the performance symbols are not displayed at 89AKS54, the normal return setting of the performance symbols display for displaying the performance symbols is performed (89AKS55). As a result, after the effect pattern is hidden, the display of the effect pattern can be returned to the normal display state corresponding to the variation pattern other than the variation pattern PD1-1. In the 89AKS55, for example, by resetting the effect symbol non-display flag, it is possible to store that the effect symbol is in the normal display state.

Next, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (AKS012). The performance control pattern may include control data for controlling performances by various performance devices according to the elapsed time from the start of variation of performance symbols during variable display of performance symbols. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 103 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command (AKS013). In addition, the setting for starting the variation of the effect pattern and the like on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed (AKS014). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern to the VDP 109, the production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R change in production patterns and the small pattern display area 9K It is only necessary to make it possible to start the fluctuation of the small symbols in . Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated (AKS015) to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation (S802), and the process is terminated.

FIG. 17-8 (A1) shows an example of determination of the final stop design of the performance design corresponding to the winning type. In AKS011 of the effect symbol variation start process, when the variable display content is any one of "1st win" to "3rd win", the fixed effect symbol of the winning combination is determined according to the variable display content. At this time, when the winning type is any one of the first special big win A, the second special big win, and the big win X via the small win, the variable display content corresponds to the "first win" and the production of money 7. A fixed effect pattern of a winning combination using the pattern is determined. In addition, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure jackpot B, the jackpot Y via the small jackpot, and the jackpot Z via the jackpot, the variable display contents correspond to the "second win", and the production pattern of red 7 is displayed. A fixed effect pattern of a winning combination using is determined. When the winning type is the first special figure jackpot C, the variable display contents correspond to the "third winning", and a winning combination using any one of the production patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9. The confirmed production pattern of is determined.

As a result, when the hit type is the first special figure jackpot A, the effect symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbols. The production pattern of gold 7 is a production pattern showing the number 7 with a display color of gold. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot B, the red 7 performance symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. The production pattern of red 7 is a production pattern showing the number 7 with a display color of red. When the winning type is the first special figure jackpot C, any one of the performance symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. When the hit type is the second special figure jackpot, the performance symbol of Gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. When the hit type is the big win X via the small win, the performance symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. When the hit type is the big hit Y via the small hit, the red 7 performance symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. When the hit type is the jackpot Z via the small hit, the red 7 performance symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols.

FIG. 17-8 (A2) shows an example of determination of a final stop symbol of the effect symbols corresponding to the variation patterns PC1-3 and PD1-1. The variation patterns PC1-3 are determinable patterns when the variable display result is "loss" in the special state final variation. The variation pattern PD1-1 is a determinable pattern when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. In AKS011 of the effect symbol variation start process, when the variable display result is "loss", the fixed effect symbol of the losing combination is determined according to the variation pattern. In the determination example of FIG. 17-8 (A2), when it is the variation pattern PC1-3, the finalized effect symbol of the reach-losing combination is determined. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PD1-1, the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination is determined. As a result, when the variable display result becomes "losing" in the special state final variation, it is possible to derive the fixed effect pattern of the reach-losing combination, while the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. In the case where the variable display result is "losing", it is possible to derive the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination. In this way, when the variable display result is "losing" in the special state final change, the variable display result is "losing" in the variable display corresponding to the fixed effect symbol that can be derived and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. , a display result in a different manner can be derived in terms of whether the winning combination is a reach-losing combination or the combination is a non-reaching combination.

In the case of the variation pattern PC1-3, there may be a case where the fixed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is determined. For example, in the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second pending storage portion at the end of the special state, if the variable display result is "losing", the non- A fixed effect pattern of the reach combination is determined. In this case, the variable display result corresponds to "losing" in the final variation of the special state, and it is possible to derive the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination, and further, the variation corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. In the display, the variable display result corresponds to "losing", and it is possible to derive the fixed effect pattern of the non-reach combination. In this way, in the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved memory portion at the end of the special state, when the variable display result is "losing", the derivable confirmed effect symbols are all In terms of non-reach combinations, it may be possible to derive a common mode of display results.

FIG. 17-8(B) shows a configuration example of small patterns that can be displayed in the small pattern display area 9K. In the small pattern display area 9K, similarly to the effect pattern display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, small patterns showing numbers 1 to 9, for example, are variably displayed as the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern. In addition, the small pattern showing the number 7 includes a small pattern showing the number 7 with a display color of red and a small pattern showing the number 7 with a display color of gold. A small pattern showing the number 7 in red is also called a red 7 small pattern. A small pattern showing the number 7 in gold is also called a gold 7 small pattern. The small patterns showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 are given the pattern numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9, respectively. The red 7 small pattern is given a pattern number of 7A. The small pattern of gold 7 is given a pattern number of 7B.

In the small pattern display area 9K, a small pattern corresponding to a final stop pattern of the performance pattern is displayed as a final stop pattern of the small pattern, and a final stop pattern of the performance pattern is displayed. , may be derivable. For example, in the variable display excluding the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved memory portion at the end of the special symbol, the variable display result is "losing" and "hit". To derive a fixed small pattern corresponding to a performance pattern. In addition, in the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved memory at the end of the special pattern, when the variable display result is "losing" in response to all the variable displays, the fixed effect pattern is displayed. A fixed small pattern is derived. On the other hand, in the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved memory at the end of the special pattern, when the variable display result is "hit" in response to one of the variable displays, the fixed production pattern There is a case to derive a fixed small pattern that is partly different from. Confirmed small patterns that are partially different from the confirmed production pattern are fixed small patterns that have some common parts that make up the confirmed production pattern, such as the left pattern and the right pattern, and small patterns that show the letter V in the middle pattern. A special display result composed of the special small symbols not included in the fixed small symbols corresponding to the performance symbols is obtained.

When the determined small pattern of the winning combination using the red 7 small pattern is derived as the final stop pattern which is the display result of the small patterns, the production pattern of red 7 is used as the final stop pattern which is the display result of the production pattern. In response to the derivation of the fixed performance pattern of the winning combination using the , the winning type is more advantageous for the player than the first special figure big winning C, the first special figure big winning B, the small winning via the big winning Y, the small winning. It will be one of the via jackpots Z. When the fixed small pattern of the winning combination using the small pattern of Gold 7 is derived as the final stop pattern which is the display result of the small patterns, the production pattern of Gold 7 is used as the final stop pattern which is the display result of the production pattern. In response to the derivation of the fixed effect pattern of the winning combination using Any one of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot X via the small jackpot that is advantageous to the player. In this way, when the second advantageous state is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, the display result of the effect symbols and the small symbols may be specified as red 7 or gold 7 effect symbols and small symbols. A specific display result composed only of patterns is derived.

A small pattern indicating the letter V in the medium pattern is assigned a pattern number of 10. - 特許庁A small pattern representing the letter V in the middle pattern is a special pattern that is not included in the small patterns that can be displayed while the variable display is being performed. By deriving a special display result including a special small pattern showing the letter V in the medium pattern as the final stop pattern which is the display result of the small pattern, the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. 2, the display result of the special symbol becomes a big win symbol or a small win symbol, and it is possible to suggest that a big win or a small win will occur. In addition, in the fluctuation display that becomes the special state final fluctuation, the display result of the special pattern becomes a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern, and if a big hit or a small hit occurs, the temporarily stopped small pattern using the special small pattern is temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then changed again to derive a fixed small pattern of a winning combination. A small pattern showing the letter V in the middle pattern is also called a V pattern, and is a special pattern for suggesting the end of the special state. The small pattern indicating the letter V is not limited to being included in the medium pattern, and may be included in part or all of the displayable pattern row including the left pattern and the right pattern. When it is included in patterns other than the middle pattern, in the following description, the small pattern indicating the letter V may be applied to the patterns other than the middle pattern.

FIG. 17-9 is a flow chart showing the small symbol determination process (89AKS01) in the effect symbol variation start process (S801). In the small symbol determination process, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop small symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol, which is the display result of the effect symbol, as the confirmed small symbol, which is the final stop symbol, which is the display result of the effect symbol. A design is determined (89AKS11). For example, if the effect pattern showing the numbers 1 to 9 has the same pattern number as the small pattern showing the numbers 1 to 9 excluding the special small pattern, the same pattern number as the fixed effect pattern The small symbol to which the symbol number of is attached may be determined as the final stop small symbol.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a setting of waiting for winning (89AKS12). For example, if the winning pending standby flag is ON, it may be determined that there is a winning pending standby setting. The winning pending standby flag may be set and turned on at 89AKS33 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21. If there is no setting for winning pending standby, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern PC3-3 is the variation pattern in the current variation display (89AKS19). If it is a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PC3-3, the process is terminated as it is, and the determined small symbol is determined to correspond to the determined effect symbol.

When the variation pattern PC3-3 is the variation pattern in the current variation display, a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol is determined (89AKS20). The temporary stop small pattern is a combination of small patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed before deriving a final display result, which is a display result of the small patterns, during execution of the variable display of the small patterns. For example, in the 89AKS20, among the final stop small symbols determined in the 89AKS11, a small symbol to be a medium symbol may be changed to a special symbol representing the letter V to determine a temporary stop small symbol. In addition, in 89AKS20, among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11, the left and right symbols are also changed to the same small symbols with different symbol numbers, and the small symbols that are medium symbols , V may be used to determine the temporary stop small symbol. The same small pattern to which another pattern number is changed at this time may be a small pattern other than the pattern numbers 7A and 7B. When the small patterns with pattern numbers 7A and 7B, which are specific patterns, are temporarily stopped and displayed as temporary stop small patterns, the expectation that the player will have an advantageous win type is heightened, and then another pattern number is displayed. Deriving the attached fixed small symbols may reduce the player's expectations. Therefore, when the 89AKS20 determines the temporary stop small symbol, a restriction may be provided so as not to determine the small symbol to be the specific symbol.

If the 89AKS 12 is set to wait for winning, it is determined whether or not the result of the variable display is a "big hit" for this variable display (89AKS 13). Here, when the variable display result is "big hit", the hit type is not only the first special big hit A to the first special big hit C or the second special big hit, but also the small hit. Also included is a case of passing through jackpot X to small hit passing through jackpot Z. If the result of the variable display is "big hit", the setting of waiting for the hit pending is erased (89AKS14), and the process is terminated. For example, the hit pending standby flag may be reset. As a result, the fixed small pattern is determined to correspond to the fixed effect pattern, and when the variable display is executed after that, the setting of the win pending standby is not set.

If the result of the variable display in 89AKS 13 is "losing" and not "big hit", among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS 11, the small symbols that are middle symbols are changed to special symbols representing the letter V. change (89AKS16). In this way, although there is a hit pending standby setting, if the variable display result of this time's variable display is "loss" instead of "big hit", and no big hit or small win occurs based on this time's variable display , it is possible to derive a special display result in which the medium pattern in the fixed small pattern is changed to a special pattern. In this case, it is determined whether or not the left and right symbols in the fixed small symbols are a combination of specific symbols (89AKS17). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the processing is terminated, thereby making it possible to derive a special display result configured by the change in the 89AKS16. If it is a combination of specific symbols, the left or right symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS18) in the finalized small symbol, and then the process is terminated. As a result, the determined small symbols different from the special symbols constituting the special display result include small symbols different from the specific symbols.

FIG. 17-10 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process process (S705). In the effect symbol change process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (AKS021). For example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, etc., it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. If the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not the special state final change has occurred (AKS022). If it is the special state final variation, final variation effect processing is executed (89AKS02). If it is not the special state final variation, the effect control corresponding to the effect control pattern is executed (AKS023), and the process is terminated.

When the variable display time has passed in AKS021, it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (AKS024). At this time, if the pattern confirmation designation command is not received, the process is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time has passed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation designation command, predetermined error processing is performed in response to the fact that the design confirmation designation command could not be received normally. may be executed. When a design confirmation designation command is received, for example, a display control command is transmitted to the VDP 109, etc., and as a result of the display of the performance symbols and small symbols, a final stop symbol is derived. display control is performed (AKS025). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving a winning start designation command (AKS026). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated (AKS027) to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803), and the process is terminated.

FIG. 17-11 is a flow chart showing the final variation effect process (89AKS02) in the effect symbol change process (S802). In the final variation effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the start of variation corresponds to the start of the current variation display (AKS 101). If it is the start of fluctuation, setting is made to start playing the moving image corresponding to the special state final fluctuation (AKS 102). The moving image corresponding to the special state final variation is, for example, continuously reproduced and displayed as a background image during the period in which the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second pending memory at the end of the special state is executed. As long as it is possible. Instead of playing back and displaying moving images, or along with playing back and displaying moving images, animation display of still images may be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the acquisition effect period (AKS103). The acquisition effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. If it is the acquisition effect period, an acquisition effect process is executed (AKS104). Also, it is determined whether or not it is an expectation-increasing effect period (AKS 105). The expectation level increasing effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. If it is the expectation level increasing effect period, an expectation level increasing effect process is executed (AKS 106). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the notice performance period (AKS107). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. Alternatively, the notice effect period may be set according to the number of notice execution times determined in the acquisition effect process. When it is the notice effect period, the notice effect processing is executed (AKS108). After that, it is determined whether or not it is the display result corresponding effect period (AKS109). The effect period corresponding to the display result may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process. However, the display result corresponding effect period may be set according to the advance notice effect period so that it can be started when the advance notice effect period ends. If it is the display result corresponding effect period, display result corresponding effect processing is executed (AKS 110).

FIG. 17-12 is a flow chart showing the acquisition effect process (AKS104) in the final variation effect process (89AKS02). In the acquisition effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the start of the acquisition effect corresponds to the start of the acquisition effect (AKS 201). If it is the acquisition effect start, the pending data is confirmed (AKS202). The pending data is storage data that can identify the contents of notification of the design designation command transmitted from the main board 31, and can be stored and saved in the storage area of the pending related data storage unit provided in the RAM 103. After that, based on the confirmation result of the reserved data, the presence or absence of the winning notice and the winning notice number are determined (90AKS01). The hit notice is a hit-suggestion notice effect that suggests that a big win or a small win will occur. The winning notice number is a number indicating the order in which the notice effect serving as the win notice is executed among the notice effects of a plurality of times.

Next, as a result of determination by 90AKS01, it is determined whether or not there is no hit notice, in which the notice effect serving as the win notice is not executed (90AKS02). If there is no winning notice, the number of times of losing notice is determined (90AKS03). The number of executions of advance notice at the time of failure is the number of times of execution of the advance notice effect as the advance notice of failure. The loss notice is a notice effect of a loss suggestion suggesting that a big hit or a small win will not occur. If there is a winning announcement to execute a winning announcement performance, the number of announcement execution times corresponding to the winning announcement number is set (90AKS04). Also, a small pattern variation setting process is executed (89AKS03).

Next, an acquisition character determination process is executed (90AKS05). In the acquisition character determination process, it is possible to determine the number of character panel images to be displayed as specific images in the acquisition effect and the characters to be displayed in each character panel image. The number of displayed character panel images, which are specific images in the obtained effect, is also called the number of obtained characters. A character shown in each character panel image is also called an announcement character. The character for notice may be a character for notice of winning when a notice of winning is executed, or a character for notice of loss when a notice of loss is executed. After execution of acquisition character determination processing, control for starting acquisition promotion notification is performed (AKS203). For example, it is sufficient if the acquisition promotion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the acquisition promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9 . Along with the display of the effect image, the acquisition promotion notification may be executed by voice output, lamp lighting, movable object operation, or a combination of some or all of these. It also performs control to start the timer update display (AKS204). For example, a timer display of "20:00" indicating the remaining 20 seconds may be started at the timer display position on the screen of the effect display device 9, and the timer display may be counted down according to the elapsed time.

If the AKS 201 does not indicate the start of acquisition effect, it is determined whether or not it is time to increase the number of acquired characters (90AKS06). The timing of increasing the number of acquired characters may be set in advance based on the number of acquired characters, the announcement character determination result, and the like, for example, when the acquired character determination process (90AKS05) is executed. When it is time to increase the number of acquired characters, control is performed to notify the increase of acquired characters (90AKS07). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a second starting prize (90AKS08). For example, when the second starting winning designation command transmitted from the main substrate 31 is received, it may be determined that the second starting winning has occurred. The second start winning designation command is for effect control when the second start switch 14a is in the ON state even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in the start switch passage process (S311). It is sufficient if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100 . When there is a second start winning, control for executing a winning notification effect is performed (90AKS09).

After that, it is determined whether or not to end the acquisition effect (AKS205). For example, based on the control data read from the obtained effect control pattern, when the end of the obtained effect is specified, it may be determined to end the obtained effect. If the acquisition effect is not to be ended, the processing is ended. On the other hand, when ending the acquisition effect, control is performed to end the acquisition promotion notification (AKS206). Also, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired characters is the maximum value of 5 (AKS207). If the number of acquired characters is other than 5, the process ends. When the acquired character number is 5, control is performed to execute acquisition completion notification (AKS208). For example, it is sufficient if the acquisition completion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the acquisition completion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9 . Acquisition completion notification may be executed by display of the effect image, sound output, lamp lighting, movable object operation, or a combination of some or all of these.

FIGS. 17-13 show display examples when the win effect is executed. FIG. 17-13(A) shows a display example 90AK01 when the win effect is started. When the acquisition effect is executed, on the screen of the effect display device 9, panel preparation images are displayed at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5 shown in FIG. An acquisition promotion notification image is displayed, and a timer image is displayed at the timer display position 90AKC1. The panel preparation image is an effect image indicating that a character panel image can be displayed in the acquisition effect. For example, in response to the fact that the maximum number of character panel images to be displayed is 5, panel preparation images indicating numbers 1 to 5 should be displayed in a predetermined order at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5. Just do it. The acquisition promotion notification image is an effect image for promoting the shooting of the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole 14 during execution of the acquisition effect. The winning promotion notification image is displayed together with the effect image of the right hitting promotion notification in the right hitting display area 9Z, so that the game ball is hit to the right hitting path, which is the second path provided with the second start winning opening 14. You may promote a right-handed hit that is In the display example 90AK01, an acquisition promotion notification image including a character image indicating the message "Collect characters!" is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB1. The timer image is an effect image for executing timer display that counts down according to the elapsed time after the acquisition effect is started. In the display example 90AK01, a timer image for starting the timer display of "20:00" indicating the remaining 20 seconds is displayed at the timer display position 90AKC1.

FIG. 17-13(B) shows a display example 90AK02 in which the winning effect is in progress. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12, when it is time to increase the number of acquired characters in 90AKS06, the increase in acquired characters is notified by controlling 90AKS07. In the display example 90AK02, when the third character panel image is displayed, the display at the panel display position 90AKA3 is changed from the display of the panel preparation image to the display of the character panel image. At this time, an effect display at the time of increase may be performed to notify the increase of acquired characters. The increase effect display may include display of a first effect image added around the increased character panel image and display of a second effect image different from the first effect image. The second effect image, for example, corresponds to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path, which is the second path, from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9. Any effect image may be used as long as it shows how the effect is exerted toward the panel image. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of displayed character panel images has increased in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 . However, in fact, the timing of increasing the number of acquired characters is set in advance when the acquired character determination process of 90AKS05 is executed in the acquired effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12. Therefore, in the acquisition effect, the number of character panel images to be displayed as the specific image is increased at the preset increase timing of acquired characters regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14.例文帳に追加can be made In this way, in the acquisition effect, the display of the effect image gives the impression that the player is involved in increasing the number of acquired characters, and at the same time, the display number of character panel images determined based on the second reserved memory number or the like is reliably displayed. can be made

The effect mode of the acquisition promotion notification may differ depending on whether the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4 or not. In AKS203 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number is the upper limit value. Depending on the result of this determination, the display mode of the effect image, the sound output mode, the lighting mode of the lamp, the movement mode of the movable object, or a combination of some or all of these are set differently. For example, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit, the display size of the effect image is made larger than when it is the upper limit, or the effect image includes a character image showing a different message "Not enough power!" , or in a different display color such as red, which is different from black in the normal state, or any acquisition promotion notification with a different presentation mode may be executed. The acquisition promotion notification when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value may be the special promotion notification.

FIG. 17-13(C) shows a display example 90AK03 when the win effect ends. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, when the acquisition effect is terminated by the AKS205, the acquisition promotion notification is terminated under the control of the AKS206. In the display example 90AK03, the display of the acquisition promotion notification image is erased at the notification display position 90AKB2, thereby ending the acquisition promotion notification. In addition, in the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, when the number of acquired characters is 5 in the AKS 207, the acquisition completion notification is executed under the control of the AKS 208. FIG. In the display example 90AK03, an acquisition completion notification image is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB2. The acquisition completion notification image is an effect image for notifying that the number of character panel images to be displayed as the specific image has reached 5, which is the maximum display number. In the display example 90AK03, an acquisition completion notification image including a character image indicating the message "acquisition completed!" is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB2. By executing such acquisition completion notification, the player can recognize that the number of displayed specific images has reached the maximum value.

17-14 show setting examples of character panel images that can be displayed as specific images. The character panel image includes a panel frame partial image, which is an effect image for which the display color of the panel frame, which is the outer frame, can be set, and a character partial image, which is an effect image showing the character in the display area within the panel frame. consists of For the panel frame partial image, for example, a white effect image is displayed as the normal display color. When a character panel image is displayed in the acquisition effect, a character panel image including a white panel frame partial image is displayed. Further, the panel frame partial image can be changed to, for example, a red or gold effect image different from white as the display color after the change when the expectation level increasing effect is executed.

FIGS. 17-14 (A1) to (E1) show character panel images including white panel frame partial images. FIGS. 17-14 (A2) to (E2) show character panel images including red panel frame partial images. FIGS. 17-14 (A3) to (E3) show character panel images including gold panel frame partial images. FIGS. 17-14 (A1), (A2), and (A3) show character panel images including character partial images of the first character AKC1. FIGS. 17-14 (B1), (B2), and (B3) show character panel images including character partial images of the second character AKC2. FIGS. 17-14 (C1), (C2), and (C3) show character panel images including character partial images of the third character AKC3. FIGS. 17-14 (D1), (D2), and (D3) show character panel images including character partial images of the fourth character AKC4. FIGS. 17-14 (E1), (E2), and (E3) show character panel images including character partial images of the fifth character AKC5.

Regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, the expectation of winning is highest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, and the fourth character AKC4 and the third character. The degree of expectation of winning decreases as the character AKC3 and the second character AKC2 become, and the degree of expectation of winning becomes lowest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. Regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, the advantage of the special state is highest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, and the fourth character AKC4. , third character AKC3, and second character AKC2, the advantage of the special state decreases, and the advantage of the special state is lowest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. Become. In the variation display of the second special symbol, when the hit type is the big win X via the small win, the number of times of variable display that can be executed in the special state as the post-win control state is 100, and the type of the hit is the big win Y via the small win. Or when it is a big hit Z via a small hit, the number of variable display times that can be executed in a special state is 15 times as a post-hit control state. Therefore, if the hit type is the big win X via the small win, the advantage of the special state increases. less advantage. It should be noted that the high-low relationship in the degree of expectation of winning and the degree of advantage of special statuses related to character partial images is a relationship that is established when character panel images including panel frame partial images with the same display color are compared, and the display colors are different. This may not hold true when comparing character panel images including panel frame partial images.

Regarding the panel frame part image included in the character panel image, the expectation is highest when the character panel image including the gold panel frame part image is displayed, and the character panel image including the red panel frame part image is displayed. When the character panel image including the white panel frame partial image is displayed, the expectation of winning is the lowest after the gold color. Note that the high and low relationship of the winning expectation level for the panel frame partial image is a relationship that is established when character panel images including character partial images with the same character are compared, and character panel images including character partial images with different characters. may not hold when comparing

FIG. 17-15(A) shows a configuration example of the hold-related data storage unit AKM01 provided in the RAM 103. FIG. The pending related data storage unit AKM01 stores various data related to the first pending storage and various data related to the second pending storage as pending related data. As the holding related data storage unit AKM01, the first holding related data storage unit corresponding to the first holding storage related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second holding storage related to the variable display of the second special symbol related to the second special symbol A corresponding second pending related data storage unit may be provided. In the reservation related data storage unit AKM01, for example, a storage area is secured for storing data indicating design designation and variation type designation so as to be identifiable in association with the reservation number. The design designation that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content of notification by the design designation command. The change type specification that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content specified by the change type command. In AKS202 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, the suspension related data stored in the second suspension related data storage unit of the suspension related data storage unit AKM01 may be confirmed as suspension data.

It is not limited to the start of the acquisition effect, and for example, the pending data may be confirmed when the variable display corresponding to the special state final variation is started. Alternatively, even after the win effect is started, the reserved data may be confirmed each time the second start winning is generated, and the effect mode such as the win effect may be changed.

FIG. 17-15(B) shows a configuration example of the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 provided in the RAM103. The final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 stores various data used for executing the final variation performance as final variation performance data. In the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02, for example, a storage area is secured for storing data indicating characters, outer frames, expectations-increasing settings, and details of notice in association with notice numbers so that they can be specified. The notice number corresponds to the order in which the notice effect is executed in the final variable effect. A character that can be stored by the final variation effect data designates a character indicated by a character partial image included in the character panel image. The outer frame that can be stored by the final variation effect data designates the display color of the panel frame partial image included in the character panel image. The expectation increase setting that can be stored by the final variation effect data designates the conditions for changing the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation increase effect and the display color after the change. The contents of the notice that can be stored by the final fluctuation performance data designate whether the suggestion by the notice performance is a losing suggestion or a winning suggestion. The performance control CPU 101 stores and saves the final variable performance data corresponding to the determination result of the performance content in the storage area of the final variable performance data storage unit AKM02 when starting the execution of the acquisition performance and the expectation level increasing performance. do it.

FIG. 17-16(A) shows a decision example 90AKD01 of the winning notice timing. The hit notice timing is the timing at which the notice effect serving as the win notice is executed. In the win effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-12, by determining the winning notice number in 90AKS01, the winning notice timing is determined according to the order of the notice effect. In the case of executing the announcement performance as a winning announcement, a variation display that becomes a winning variation from which a big winning symbol or a small winning symbol is derived is specified. When the final variation in the special state is executed, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the variation display to be the final variation is a hit variation from the specified contents of the display result specification command. In addition, by reading the symbol specification of the reservation related data stored in the reservation related data storage unit AKM01, the reservation number of the variation display that becomes the winning variation may be specified. In addition, when there are a plurality of hit variations, the variation display that is performed first is used. When the winning notice number is 1, as the first notice effect, the winning notice in the form of the effect suggesting a win is executed. When the winning notice number is 2, the winning notice is executed as the second notice effect. When the winning notice number is 3, the winning notice is executed as the third notice effect. When the winning notice number is 4, the winning notice is executed as the fourth notice effect. When the winning notice number is 5, the winning notice is executed as the fifth notice effect.

In the determination example 90AKD01, when the winning variation is the special state final variation, the winning notice number is determined to be 1 with a determination rate of 100%. When the winning variation is the first one in the second retention storage, that is, when the retention number is a variation display of 1, the winning notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 70%, and the winning notice is decided with a decision rate of 30%. The number is determined to be 2. When the winning variation is the second one in the second retention storage, that is, when the retention number is a variation display of 2, the winning notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 30%, and the winning notice is decided with a decision rate of 60%. The number is determined to be 2, and the winning notice number is determined to be 3 at a determination rate of 10%. When the winning variation is the third one in the second retention storage, that is, when the retention number is a variation display of 3, the winning notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 10%, and the winning notice is decided with a decision rate of 30%. The number is determined to be 2, the winning notice number is determined to be 3 with a decision rate of 50%, and the winning notice number is decided to be 4 with a decision rate of 10%. When the winning variation is the 4th one in the second retention storage, that is, when the retention number is a variation display of 4, the winning notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 10%, and the winning notice is determined with a decision rate of 10%. The number is determined to be 2, the winning notice number is decided to be 3 with a decision rate of 30%, the winning notice number is decided to be 4 with a decision rate of 40%, and the winning notice number is decided to be 5 with a decision rate of 10%. be done. When there is no winning change, the winning notice number is not determined, and the notice performance as the winning notice is not executed.

In this way, in the determination example 90AKD01, when the value obtained by adding 1 to the holding number corresponding to the variable display that becomes the hit fluctuation is set as the corresponding notice value, the hit holding number is set to a value below the corresponding notice value. , the decision rate is set. In addition, the hit reservation number has a higher determination rate of a value that is less than the corresponding advance notice value than the determination rate of the corresponding advance notice value. With such a setting, the number of executions of the notice effect tends to be less than the total number of times of the variation display which is the winning variation and the variation display which is executed before the winning variation. As a result, the degree of freedom in the control of the notice effect is increased without being bound by the corresponding relationship between the notice effect and the variable display, and the period until the notice effect that suggests a hit is executed is shortened, so that the player can It is possible to prevent giving an impression of lengthening. In addition, it is not limited to the determination rate in the determination example 90AKD01, the winning reservation number is a value equal to or less than the corresponding previous notice value, and the winning notice number is determined to be a value less than the corresponding previous notice value than the ratio determined as the corresponding previous notice value. An arbitrary decision rate may be set so that the rate of

Unlike decision example 90AKD01, there may be a case where the winning notice number is determined to be a value exceeding the corresponding notice value. In this case, the number of times of execution of the notice effect is greater than the total number of times of the variation display which is the winning variation and the variation display which is performed before the winning variation. As a result, the degree of freedom in the control of the notice effect is increased without being bound by the corresponding relationship between the notice effect and the variable display, and the period until the notice effect that suggests a hit is executed is extended, so that the player can It is possible to maintain attention to the advance notice effect.

FIG. 17-16(B) shows a decision example 90AKD02 of the number of executions of advance notice when losing. The number of executions of the notice at the time of loss is the number of times the notice effect serving as the notice of loss is executed when the notice effect serving as the notice of winning is not executed. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, the number of executions of the notice when losing is determined in 90AKS03. In 90AKS03, the number of advance notice executions is determined based on the second reserved storage number. In decision example 90AKD02, when the second reserved memory count is 0, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 10%, the number of notice executions is decided at 2 with a decision rate of 40%, and 30%. The decision rate determines the number of advance notice executions to be 3, the decision rate of 10% determines the number of advance notice executions to be 4, and the decision rate of 10% determines the number of advance notice executions to be 5. When the second reserved memory number is 1, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 2 at a decision rate of 10%, the number of notice executions is decided to be 3 at a decision rate of 50%, and the notice is given at a decision rate of 30%. The number of executions is determined to be 4, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 at a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved storage number is 2, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 3 at a decision rate of 10%, the number of notice executions is decided to be 4 at a decision rate of 60%, and the notice is given at a decision rate of 30%. The number of executions is determined to be 5. When the second reserved storage number is 3, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 70%. When the second reserved memory count is 4, the notice execution count is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

Thus, in decision example 90AKD02, when the value obtained by adding 1 to the second reserved storage number is set as the correspondence notice value, the decision rate is set so that the number of times of notice execution becomes a value equal to or greater than the correspondence notice value. It is In addition, regarding the number of times of notice execution, the rate of determination of a value exceeding the corresponding notice value is higher than the decision rate of the corresponding notice value. With these settings, if all the variable display results corresponding to the special state final variation and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory are "losing", the special state final variation and the variation corresponding to the second reserved memory The number of times the announcement effect is executed tends to be greater than the total number of times it is displayed. As a result, the degree of freedom in controlling the notice performance is increased without being bound by the corresponding relationship between the notice performance and the variable display, and the period in which the notice performance suggesting loss is executed is extended to allow the player to respond to the hit variation. can sustain the expectation of In addition, it is not limited to the determination rate in the decision example 90AKD02, the number of times of execution of notice for loss is a value equal to or more than the corresponding notice value, and the number of times of notice execution for loss exceeds the corresponding notice value than the ratio determined by the corresponding notice value. An arbitrary determination rate may be set so that the rate of determination of values is high.

In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, the final variation effect data indicating the determination result of the winning notice number by 90AKS01 and the determination result of the number of times of notice execution at loss by 90AKS03 is stored in the storage area of the final change effect data storage unit AKM02. should be stored in the . For example, when the winning notice number is determined by 90AKS01, the final change performance data designating the winning suggestion as the notice content is stored in the final change performance data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number that becomes the winning notice number. Store and save in the area. In this case, in association with a notice number smaller than the winning notice number, the final variation performance data designating the suggestion of losing as the content of the notice is stored and saved in the storage area of the final variation performance data storage part AKM02. As a result, when the number of notice execution times corresponding to the winning notice number is set in the acquisition effect processing 90AKS04, as the notice effect to be executed before the winning notice, the losing notice suggesting the loss is executed. setting becomes possible. In addition, when the number of executions of advance notice at the time of failure is determined by 90AKS03, the final fluctuation production data designating the suggestion of failure as the content of the advance notice is associated with the advance notice number that is equal to or less than the number of executions of advance notice at the time of failure. It is stored and saved in the storage area of the storage unit AKM02. As a result, setting can be made so that a loss notice suggesting a loss is executed as one or a plurality of notice effects corresponding to the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss.

FIG. 17-17 is a flow chart showing the acquisition character determination process (90AKS05) in the acquisition effect process (AKS104). In the acquired character determination process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of acquired characters (91AKS01). The number of obtained characters is the number of displayed character panel images that are specific images in the obtained effect. In 91AKS01, for example, the number of acquired characters may be determined depending on whether or not the announcement effect as a winning announcement is executed. Subsequently, 1 is set to the target notice number (90AKS11). The target notice number in the acquired character determination process is, for example, among the notice numbers associated with the storage area of the final change effect data in the final change effect data storage unit AKM02, the determination target regarding the character in the acquisition effect or the notice effect. A notice number is specified.

Next, it is determined whether or not the target announcement number is a winning announcement number (90AKS12). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12. Then, if it is a winning announcement number, a winning announcement character is determined (90AKS13). On the other hand, if it is not a winning notice number, a losing notice character is determined (90AKS14). Both the hit notice character and the loss notice character can be determined to be any one of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5. At this time, it is determined whether or not the character determined as the hit notice character or loss notice character is any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 (90AKS15). If it is any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the character of the remaining notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 (90AKS16). The final variation performance data indicating the determination result by 90AKS14 or 90AKS15 and 90AKS16 may be stored and saved in the storage area of the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number that is the target notice number or the remaining notice number. . If it is any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 at 90AKS15, then at 90AKS16 the character of the remaining advance notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation of winning from being excessively increased according to the display mode of the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect. Further, even when a plurality of pieces of specific hold information are stored in the hold information to be the second hold storage, the characters from the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 are determined only once, so that a big win is achieved. To prevent a player from recognizing the repeated control to an advantageous state such as a game state or a small winning game state at an early stage, and to enable an appropriate display performance to keep expectation for the advantageous state.

A character panel image containing a character partial image of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 is a character panel containing a character partial image of either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. The probability of winning and the advantage of special conditions are higher than images. In the acquisition effect, a range is defined in which a character panel image including a character partial image of a character with a high probability of winning or an advantage of a special state is displayed as a character panel image showing one of a plurality of acquired characters. There is a limitation that a character panel image including a character partial image of a character having a high chance of winning or having a high degree of special status advantage is not displayed as a character panel image showing the character to be acquired thereafter.

In 90AKS15, if the character is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, and none of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it is determined whether or not the target notice number is the notice execution count. (90AKS17). If it is not the notice execution count, the target notice number is incremented by 1 (90AKS18). After that, the processing is returned to 90AKS12, and acquired characters are sequentially determined. Finally, the acquisition character increase timing is set (90AKS19), and the process ends.

FIGS. 17-18 show an example 91AKD01 of determining the number of acquired characters. In the obtained character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, the number of obtained characters is determined in 91AKS01. In decision example 91AKD01, in the case of no winning notice, which does not include a winning notice among the one or more notice effects executed in the final variation display, the same number as the number of notice executions The number of acquired characters is determined. Therefore, when a notice effect that is a failure notice is executed as one or a plurality of notice effects, the number of character panel images corresponding to the number of executions of the notice effect can be displayed in the acquisition effect.

In decision example 91 AKD01, if there is a winning notice that includes a winning notice among the one-time or multiple notice effects executed in the final variation display, the number of times is determined according to the number of second pending memories. The number of acquired characters is determined by the determination rate. For example, when the second reserved memory number is 0, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 1 at a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 40%, and the number of acquired characters is determined at a determination rate of 30%. The number of acquired characters is determined to be 3, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 10%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 1, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 3 at a determination rate of 50%, and the number of acquired characters is determined at a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be 4, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 at a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 2, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 3 at a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 at a determination rate of 60%, and the number of acquired characters is determined at a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be 5. When the second reserved memory number is 3, the acquired character number is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%, and the acquired character number is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 70%. When the second reserved memory number is 4, the acquired character number is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

As described above, in the determination example 91AKD01, the number of acquired characters equal to the number of executions of the announcement is determined when there is no winning announcement. In addition, in decision example 91AKD01, the decision rate is set so that the number of acquired characters is equal to or greater than the corresponding notice value for the corresponding notice value obtained by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number when there is a winning notice. It is As for the number of acquired characters, the determination rate of the value exceeding the correspondence notice value is higher than the determination rate of the correspondence notice value. Such a setting is common to the setting of the determination rate in the determination example 90AKD02 of the number of executions of advance notice at the time of failure shown in FIG. 17-16(B). Therefore, the number of acquired characters can be determined with a common determination rate for each corresponding advance notice value in the case without the hit notice and in the case with the hit notice. As a result, in the acquisition effect, the number of character panel images displayed as the specific image does not indicate the degree of expectation for winning, and the degree of attention of the player is prevented from decreasing when the character panel images are displayed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the subsequent performance. In addition, since the number of acquired characters is determined at a determination rate corresponding to the number of second reserved memories regardless of the winning notice number, there is freedom in controlling the acquisition performance without being bound by the corresponding relationship between the notice performance and the variable display. degree can be increased. In addition, it is not limited to the determination rate in decision example 91AKD01, and the number of acquired characters is a value equal to or greater than the corresponding advance notice value, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value exceeding the corresponding advance notice value than the ratio determined by the corresponding advance notice value. An arbitrary decision rate may be set so that the rate of

The acquired character number and the second reserved memory number are related in that the acquired character number can be determined to be the same value as the corresponding advance notice value. Also, even when the number of acquired characters is determined to exceed the corresponding advance notice value, the closer the value is to the corresponding advance notice value, the higher the ratio of the acquired character number is determined. In this way, the acquired character number and the second reserved memory number are also related in that the acquired character number is likely to be determined to a value close to the corresponding advance notice value. Thereby, in the acquisition effect, it is possible to display the character panel images of the display number related to the storage number of the reservation information to be the second reservation memory.

In decision example 91AKD01, the number of acquired characters is determined to be five when the second reserved memory number is four. Acquisition character determination processing is executed by 90AKS05 when the acquisition effect is started in AKS201 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12. Therefore, when the acquisition effect is started, if the number of second reserved storage has reached the upper limit value of 4, even if the game ball does not pass through the second start winning opening 14 after that, the number of acquired characters is is determined to be 5, the number of display of character panel images becomes 5 which is the maximum display number in acquisition performance, and 5 character panel images corresponding to 5 advance notice performances can be displayed.

FIG. 17-19(A) shows a determination example 90AKD11 of a winning announcement character. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, a winning announcement character is determined in 90AKS12. In determination example 90AKD11, a winning notice character is determined at a determination rate according to the winning type of the symbol designation stored by the pending related data. For example, if the type of hit designated by the pattern is the second special big win or the big win X via the small win, the first character AKC1 is determined as the winning notice character at a decision rate of 5%, and at a decision rate of 10%. The second character AKC2 is determined to be the hit notice character, the third character AKC3 is determined to be the hit notice character at a decision rate of 15%, and the fourth character AKC4 is decided to be the hit notice character at a decision rate of 20%. , the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the winning announcement character at a determination rate of 50%. When the type of winning specified in the pattern is a big winning Y via a small winning, the first character AKC1 is determined as the winning announcement character at a determination rate of 10%, and the second character AKC2 is determined as the winning announcement character at a determination rate of 15%. The third character AKC3 is determined as the hit notice character with a decision rate of 20%, the fourth character AKC4 is decided as the win notice character with a decision rate of 35%, and the third character AKC4 is decided as the win notice character with a decision rate of 20%. The 5 character AKC5 is determined as the winning announcement character. When the design-specified winning type is a small winning via a big winning Z, any one of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 is determined as a winning notice character at a determination rate of 20%.

In this way, in the determination example 90AKD11, there are cases where the design-designated win type is the second special figure jackpot or the jackpot X via the small hit, the case where the jackpot Y is the jackpot via the small hit, and the case where the jackpot Z is the jackpot via the small hit. , the determination rate of the winning notice character is different. After the winning notice character is indicated by one of the character panel images displayed in the winning effect, in the notice effect related to the character panel image showing the winning notice character, the win notice is a winning notice effect. is executed. When the winning type is either the second special figure big winning or the big winning X via the small winning, the post-winning control state can be controlled to the special state until the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times. When the winning type is either a big winning Y via a small winning or a big winning Z via a small winning, as a post-winning control state, a special state can be controlled until the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 15 times. Further, when the winning type is the big winning Y via the small winning, the number of rounds in the big winning game state is 10, and the rounds in which the V big winning opening is open can be executed up to 10 times. When the winning type is the big winning Z via the small winning, the number of rounds in the big winning game state is 5, and the rounds in which the big winning opening is opened can be executed up to 5 times. Therefore, depending on which of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 the hit notice character is, the degree of advantage in the jackpot game state and the post-win control state differs, thereby increasing the degree of advantage for the player. is different. It should be noted that the determination rate is not limited to the determination rate in determination example 90AKD11, and an arbitrary determination rate may be set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the winning announcement character.

FIG. 17-19(B) shows a determination example 90AKD12 of the character for notifying failure. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, the character for notifying loss is determined in 90AKS13. In determination example 90AKD12, the character for failure notice is determined at a determination rate corresponding to the failure notice. For example, the first character AKC1 is determined to be the failure notice character with a determination rate of 40%, the second character AKC2 is determined to be the failure notice character with a determination rate of 30%, and the third character AKC3 is determined at a determination rate of 20%. is determined as the character for notice of failure, the fourth character AKC4 is determined as the character for notification of failure with a determination rate of 9%, and the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the character for notice of failure with a determination rate of 1%.

Thus, in decision example 90AKD12, the decision rate of the first character AKC1 is the highest, and the decision rate of the second character AKC2, the third character AKC3, and the fourth character AKC4 decreases, and the decision rate of the fifth character AKC5 is the highest. lowest decision rate. By setting the determination rate in determination examples 90AKD11 and 90AKD12, regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, the expectation level is high. The level of expectation for winning decreases as the fourth character AKC4, the third character AKC3, and the second character AKC2 become the highest, and the level of expectation for winning decreases when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. lowest degree. Further, in the notice effect related to the character panel image showing the character for notice of loss, the notice effect of the suggestion of loss is executed. Therefore, in the advance notice effect, the percentage of the suggestion of losing or the suggestion of winning differs depending on the character indicated by the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect. In addition, it is not limited to the decision rate in decision example 90AKD12, and an arbitrary decision rate may be set so that the ratio of whether the related notice effect is a loss notice or a hit notice differs according to the character indicated by the character panel image. It is sufficient if it is set.

FIGS. 17-20 show a control example 90AKE01 of the win effect. The win effect is executed during the period from timing AKT02 to timing AKT03 shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6. This period may be a period until a certain period of time elapses, such as 10 seconds. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, acquisition character increase timing is set in 90AKS19. The acquired character increase timing is the timing at which the display is updated so that the number of displayed character panel images, which are the specific images, increases in the acquired effect. As shown in FIG. 17-13(B), when the display of the panel preparation image is changed to the display of the character panel image, and the number of displayed character panel images increases, the effect image is displayed to It is possible to give an impression to the player that the number of displayed character panel images has increased in response to the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 14.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the acquisition character increase timing is set in advance in acquisition character determination processing 90AKS19, and in the acquisition effect processing shown in FIGS. An increase in acquired characters can be reported. Therefore, the timing at which the number of displayed character panel images increases is not affected by whether or not the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 .

The acquisition character increase timing may be set fixedly or variably so that the interval before and after is, for example, 0.5 seconds or more and 1.5 seconds or less. In the control example 90AKE01, the timings 90AKT01 to 90AKT05 are set as acquired character increase timings corresponding to the increase in the number of displayed character panel images for the first to fifth character acquisitions. Then, an interval AKL1 from the acquisition effect start timing AKT02 to timing 90AKT01, which is the first acquisition character increase timing, an interval AKL2 from timing 90AKT01 to timing 90AKT02, which is the acquisition character increase timing for the second time, and a third time from timing 90AKT02. Interval AKL3 up to timing 90AKT03 which is the acquired character increase timing, interval AKL4 from timing 90AKT03 to timing 90AKT04 which is the fourth acquired character increase timing, interval AKL5 from timing 90AKT04 to timing 90AKT05 which is the fifth acquired character increase timing are set to be within the range of 0.5 seconds or more and 1.5 seconds or less. For example, the effect control CPU 101 may determine the acquired character increase timing each time by extracting the numerical data as the acquired character increase timing determination random number and referring to the acquired character increase timing determination table. Alternatively, as a timing pattern combining obtained character increase timings, a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance for each obtained character number, and the obtained character increase timing for each time may be determined by selecting one of the timing patterns. By sequentially increasing the number of character panel images to be displayed as a specific image each time the obtained character increase timing determined in this way is reached, a decrease in interest due to the monotonous display of the specific image is prevented, and a sense of incongruity is created. Appropriate display rendering is possible.

In the acquisition effect, the timing at which the number of displayed character panel images increases is the acquisition character increase timing common to the case where the game ball enters and does not enter the second start winning opening 14.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the winning effect, the player is urged to shoot a right-handed game ball toward the second start winning hole 14 by performing the acquisition promotion notification. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12, when there is a second start winning at 90AKS08, the winning notification effect is executed under the control of 90AKS09. For example, an increase stimulus effect display may be performed to encourage an increase in the number of displayed character panel images. For example, the display of the increased fanning effect is performed from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9, corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path, which is the second path. It is only necessary to display an effect image showing how the effect is exerted toward the panel preparation image. Alternatively, the increased hype effect display may be arbitrary display such as a flash display in which the entire screen of the effect display device 9 flashes or a blackout display in which the entire screen is blacked out. By executing such a winning notification effect, it is possible to give an impression that the player is involved in increasing the number of acquired characters, and to promote a game by shooting a game ball that hits to the right.

The acquisition character increase timing may be changed depending on whether or not the player shoots right-handed game balls. For example, in the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12, it is determined whether or not the shooting of a right-handed game ball is detected at 90AKS06 when it is the acquisition character increase timing. At this time, when it is detected, the number of displayed character panel images is increased at the determined acquisition character increase timing. On the other hand, when it is not detected, the timing for increasing the number of displayed character panel images may be delayed by changing the determined acquired character increase timing to the timing by adding a predetermined time such as one second.

FIG. 17-21 is a flow chart showing the small symbol change setting process (89AKS03) in the acquisition effect process (AKS104). The small symbol change setting process is executed corresponding to the case where there is a winning notice in 90AKS02 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12. When there is a winning notice, either the special symbol final variation or the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory becomes a winning variation, and the display result of the special symbol becomes a big winning symbol or a small winning symbol. In the small symbol change setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit variation is the special state final variation (89AKS31). If the winning variation is the special state final variation, there is no need to change the fixed small symbol to be the final stop small symbol, so the process is terminated as it is.

If the hit variation is not the special state final variation but any variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory, the final stop small symbol is confirmed (89AKS32). For example, the effect control CPU 101 may confirm the final stop small symbol by reading the stored data of the final stop small symbol determined in 89AKS11 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9. Among the final stop small symbols confirmed at this time, the small symbols that are medium symbols are changed to special symbols representing the letter V (89AKS33). In this way, if the special state final variation is not a winning variation but one of the variation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage is a winning variation, the middle symbol in the fixed small symbols corresponding to the current variation display is a special symbol. By changing to a pattern, a special display result can be derived. In this case, the setting of waiting for winning is performed (89AKS34). For example, a winning pending standby flag provided in the RAM 103 may be set. After that, it is determined whether or not the left and right symbols in the fixed small symbols are a combination of specific symbols (89AKS35). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the processing is terminated, thereby making it possible to derive a special display result configured by the change in the 89AKS33. If it is a combination of specific symbols, the left or right symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS36) in the finalized small symbol, and then the process is terminated. As a result, the determined small symbols different from the special symbols constituting the special display result include small symbols different from the specific symbols.

FIG. 17-22 is a flow chart showing the expectation increase effect processing (AKS106) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the expectation degree increasing effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the timing AKT03 at which the expectation degree increasing effect can be started (91AKS11). The expectations-increasing effect shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started at timing AKT03. If it is timing AKT03, it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is the upper limit value of 4 (91AKS12). At this time, if the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and not 4, the expectation level increasing effect is prohibited (91AKS13). For example, by canceling the setting of the expectation level increasing effect period, the expectation level increasing effect process may be set so as not to be executed in the subsequent final variation effect process. As a result, when the timing AKT03 at which the expectation-increasing effect can be started is reached, a range is defined in which the number of second reserved memories does not reach the upper limit value of 4, and the expectation-increasing effect, which is a change effect, is performed. A limiting limit is set to not execute.

When the expectation level increasing effect is not executed, the acquisition effect may be continuously executed. When the second starting prize is generated during execution of this acquisition effect, the number of displayed character panel images may be increased in the acquisition effect, or the acquisition effect may be ended and the execution of the expectation increase effect may be started. good. Alternatively, when the expectation-increasing effect is not executed, the acquisition effect may end without continuing. In this case, an effect different from the acquired effect may be executed, or a standby state may be set until execution of the advance notice effect is started.

When the timing AKT03 at which the expectation level increasing performance can be started is reached, if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value of 4, the expectation level increasing performance as a changing performance can be executed. control is performed. For example, in 91AKS12, if the second reserved memory number is 4, the target notice number is set to 1 (91AKS14). The target notice number in the expectation level increase effect processing is, for example, the notice number to be determined regarding the expectation level increase effect among the notice numbers associated with the storage area of the final change effect data in the final change effect data storage unit AKM02. A number is specified. Incidentally, even when the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value of 4, the expectations-increasing effect may not be executed at a predetermined ratio. When the number of second pending memories reaches the upper limit of 4, for example, while the expectation level increasing effect is executed at a high rate such as 90%, the expectation level is increased at a low rate such as 10%. The up effect may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the target announcement number is a winning announcement number (91AKS15). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12. Then, if it is a hit notice number, it decides to increase the hit notice expectation degree (91AKS16). The decision to increase the expectation level of the winning notice includes deciding whether or not to change the display mode of the character panel image when the notice effect related to the character panel image serving as the specific image is a winning notice suggesting a win. and determining the display mode after the change in the case where the display mode is changed. On the other hand, if it is not a winning notice number, it decides to increase the loss notice expectation degree (91AKS17). The decision to increase the degree of expectation of loss notice is made by deciding whether or not to change the display mode of the character panel image when the notice effect associated with the character panel image, which is the specific image, is a loss notice suggesting a loss. and determining the display mode after the change in the case where the display mode is changed. The final variation effect data indicating the determination result by 91AKS16 or 91AKS17 may be stored and saved in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number serving as the target notice number. After that, it is determined whether or not the result of the decision to increase the degree of expectation of winning notice or the degree of expectation of losing notice is no increase of expectation degree which does not change the display mode of the character panel image (91AKS18).

If the result of the decision to increase the level of expectation is to increase the level of expectation by changing the display mode of the character panel image, the conditions for increasing the level of expectation are determined (92AKS01). The expectation-increasing condition is a condition that must be satisfied in order to change the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation-increasing effect. For example, the expectation-increasing condition is selected from a plurality of types of conditions, such as the occurrence of the second start winning, the end of the expectation-increasing effect, a specific timing during the expectation-increasing effect, or a combination of some or all of these. can be determined by The final variation performance data indicating the expectation degree-up condition determined at this time may be stored and saved in the storage area of the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number serving as the target notice number. Then, it is determined whether or not the target announcement number is the number of announcement execution times (91AKS19). If it is not the notice execution count, the target notice number is incremented by 1 (91AKS20). After that, the processing is returned to 91AKS15, and the increase in the degree of expectation of winning notice and the degree of expectation of losing notice are sequentially determined. If it is the number of notice executions, control is performed to start the continuation promotion notice (91AKS21). For example, it is sufficient if the continuation promotion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the continuation promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9 . Along with the display of the effect image, the continuation promotion notification may be executed by voice output, lamp lighting, movable object operation, or a combination of some or all of these.

If it is not the timing AKT03 at 91AKS11, it is determined whether or not there is a second start winning (91AKS22). For example, when the second starting winning designation command transmitted from the main substrate 31 is received, it may be determined that the second starting winning has occurred. The second start winning designation command is for effect control when the second start switch 14a is in the ON state even when the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in the start switch passage process (S311). It is sufficient if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100 . If there is a second starting prize, it is determined whether or not the degree of expectation cannot be increased (91AKS23). For example, if the occurrence of the second starting prize is not included in the expectation level increase condition, or if the expectation level increase has already been executed, it may be determined that the expectation level cannot be increased. If it is not possible to increase the degree of expectation, control is performed to execute a fanning effect (91AKS24). For example, a cheering effect display may be performed to encourage the change in the display mode of the character panel image. For example, one character is displayed from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path, which is the second path. What is necessary is just to display an effect image showing how the effect is exerted toward the panel image. Alternatively, the stirring effect display may be an arbitrary effect display such as a flash display that flashes the entire screen of the effect display device 9 or a blackout display that causes the entire screen of the effect display device 9 to black out.

If there is no second start winning at 91AKS22, it is determined whether or not another expectation increase condition has been established (91AKS25). If it is possible to raise the expectation level at 91AKS23, or if another condition for raising the expectation level is satisfied at 91AKS25, control is performed to execute the notification of the increased expectation level (91AKS26). At this time, since the expectation increase condition is satisfied, for example, if the display mode of the character panel image corresponding to the notice number is changed in accordance with the expectation increase setting indicated by the data stored in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02, good. Also, an effect display at the time of change may be performed to notify that the display mode of the character panel image has changed. Similar to the effect display at the time of increase in the acquisition effect, the effect display at the time of change is the display of a first effect image added around the character panel image whose display mode has changed, and a second effect image different from the first effect image. and may include a display of For example, the second effect image is displayed from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path that is the second path. Any effect image may be used as long as it shows how an effect is applied to the character panel image that has changed. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player an impression that the display mode of the character panel image has changed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 . However, in reality, the display mode of the character panel image may be changed due to the fulfillment of an expectation increase condition that is different from the occurrence of the second start winning. Therefore, in the expectation-increasing effect, even if the game ball enters or does not enter the second start prize-winning port 14, if the preset expectation-increasing condition is satisfied, the display mode of the character panel image becomes the specific image. can be changed. On the other hand, in the expectation-increasing effect, a character panel image that becomes a specific image if the preset expectation-increasing condition is not satisfied, regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 . does not change the display mode of

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is the timing AKT04 for ending the expectation level increasing effect (91AKS27). The execution of the expectations increasing effect shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 ends at timing AKT04. If the timing is not AKT04, the process ends. When it is timing AKT04, control is performed to end the continuation promotion notification (91AKS28). In addition, control is performed to end the timer update display (91AKS29), and the process ends.

FIG. 17-23 shows a display example when the expectation level increasing effect is executed. FIG. 17-23(A) shows a display example 91AK01 when the expectation increasing effect is started. When the expectation level increasing effect is executed, five character panel images are displayed at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5 on the screen of the effect display device 9, and a continuation promotion notification is displayed at the notification display position 91AKB1. An image is displayed. The expectation-increasing effect can be executed when the second reserved memory number is 4, which is the upper limit value, and is restricted so as not to be executed when the second reserved memory number is less than 4. - 特許庁When the second reserved memory number is 4, the number of character panel images to be displayed in the acquisition effect is 5 corresponding to the number of acquired characters being 5, and 5 character panel images are displayed. . The continuation promotion notification image is a performance image for promoting shooting of the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole 14 continuously from the acquisition performance during the execution of the expectation level increasing performance. The continuation promotion notification image is displayed together with the effect image of the right hitting promotion notification in the right hitting display area 9Z, so that the game ball is hit to the right hitting path, which is the second path provided with the second start winning opening 14. You may promote a right-handed hit that is In the display example 91AK01, a continuation promotion notification image including a character image indicating the message "Still aiming!" is displayed at the notification display position 91AKB1.

If the expectation level increasing condition includes the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the expectation level increasing condition is met when the second starting winning prize occurs as shown in FIG. 17-23(B). FIG. 17-23(C) is a display example 91AK02 when the expectation level increasing condition is met in the expectation level increasing effect. 17-22, when there is a second starting prize in 91AKS22 and the expectation level can be increased in 91AKS23, the expectation level increase is notified by the control of 91AKS26. In display example 91AK02, in the fifth character panel image, the display mode of the character panel image is changed by changing the display color of the panel frame partial image from white to gold. At this time, the change-time effect display described with respect to 91AKS26 of the expectation-increasing effect process may be performed. In this way, in the expectation-increasing effect, the effect image is displayed to give the impression that the player is involved in the change of the character panel image, and the game by shooting the game ball to the right can be promoted.

FIG. 17-24(A) shows a determination example 91AKD11 of increasing the degree of expectation for winning notice. In the expectation increase effect process shown in FIG. 17-22, in 91AKS16, it is decided to increase the hit notice expectation. In determination example 91 AKD11, whether or not to increase the expectation level and the display color after the change are determined at a determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target announcement number. For example, if the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, the decision rate is 40% without increasing the degree of expectation, and the expectation that the color is changed to red is 50%. It is decided to increase the degree, and it is decided to increase the expectation degree to change to gold with a decision rate of 10%. In addition, if the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it will be decided without raising expectations with a decision rate of 20%, and a red color with a decision rate of 60%. It is determined to increase the expectation level to change to gold, and it is determined to increase the expectation level to change to gold at a decision rate of 20%.

Thus, in decision example 91AKD11, the character displayed in the character panel image is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, or any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate of the advance notice expectation level up is different. Specifically, in the case of any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the display color is changed at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. up. Therefore, the ratio of changing the display mode of the character panel image differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate display effect that increases the player's attention by varying the expectation that the display mode of the character panel image will change.

FIG. 17-24(B) shows a determination example 91AKD12 of increasing the degree of expectation of loss notice. In the expectation degree increase effect processing shown in FIG. 17-22, the loss notice expectation degree increase is determined in 91AKS17. In determination example 91 AKD12, whether or not to increase the expectation level and the display color after the change are determined at a determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target announcement number. For example, if the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, the decision rate is 85% without increasing the expectation level, and the decision rate is 13%. It is decided to increase the degree, and it is decided to increase the expectation degree to change to gold with a decision rate of 2%. In addition, if the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it is decided with a 90% decision rate without raising expectations, and with a 9% decision rate, the red color It is determined to increase the expectation level to change to gold, and it is determined to increase the expectation level to change to gold with a decision rate of 1%.

As described above, in decision example 91AKD12, the character displayed in the character panel image is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, or any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate of the advance notice expectation level up is different. Specifically, in the case of any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the expectation level does not increase at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. Therefore, the ratio of changing the display mode of the character panel image differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. In addition, in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, the display mode is more likely to change due to the increase in the degree of anticipation of loss notification rather than the increase in expectation degree of prediction of winning, whereas the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. In the case of any one of the above, the display mode is more likely to change due to the increase in the degree of expectation of winning notice rather than the increase in the degree of expectation of prediction of loss. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning when the display mode of the character panel image is changed can be changed according to the character shown by the character panel image, thereby making it possible to perform an appropriate display performance to change the expectation of the player.

FIG. 17-25 shows a setting example 92AK01 of the expectation level increasing condition. 17-22, when there is an expectation increase in 91AKS18, an expectation increase condition is determined by 92AKS01. In setting example 92AK01, the expectation level increasing condition for changing the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation level increasing effect is prepared so that it can be selected and determined from a plurality of types of expectation level increasing conditions, such as the expectation level increasing conditions 92AKC01 to 92AKC03. ing. Each of the expectation degree increasing conditions may be a setting that is partially or wholly different for a plurality of conditions such as the second starting prize winning, the timing forcibly increasing during the effect, and the timing for ending the effect. The second starting prize is a condition that can be established when the second starting prize occurs. The compulsory up timing during production is a condition that can be established when the compulsory up timing provided during execution of the expectation level raising production comes. The performance end timing is a condition that can be established when the expectation level increasing performance ends.

All of the expectation level increasing conditions 92AKC01 to 92AKC03 are set to be established when the second start winning prize is generated. Therefore, when the second starting prize-winning occurs, the display mode of the character panel image, which is the specific image, can be changed regardless of which expectation level-increasing condition is determined. On the other hand, the expectation degree increasing condition 92AKC01 includes a combination of the conditions that there is a compulsory increase timing during the performance and there is no timing for ending the performance. The expectation degree increasing condition 92AKC02 includes a combination of conditions that there is no compulsory up timing during the performance and there is an end timing for the performance. The expectation level up condition 92AKC03 includes a combination of conditions such as no forced up timing during presentation and no presentation end timing.

As described above, in the setting example 92AK01, when the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01 is determined, it is possible to change the display mode of the character panel image by setting the performance compulsory timing in the expectation level increasing performance. Further, when the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC02 is determined, in the expectation level increasing effect, when the game ball passes through the second starting winning hole 14, the display mode of the character panel image is changed, and the second starting winning hole is changed. When the game ball does not pass through 14, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed when the expectation-increasing performance ends. When the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC03 is determined, in the expectation level increasing effect, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening 14, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed, but the second start When the game ball does not pass through the prize winning opening 14, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed, and the expectation increase in the expectation increase performance is not performed.

Instead of the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01, or together with the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01, a case where the condition does not include the occurrence of the second start winning may be provided. In this case, even when the game ball passes through the second starting prize-winning port 14 in the expectation-increasing effect, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed at this time, and the character panel image is displayed at the time of the forced-up timing during the effect. The display mode of is changed. In this way, when the condition of the forced-up timing is included during the performance, the display mode of the character panel image is displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the second start prize-winning port 14 in the expectation level-increasing performance. can be changed, and the change timing can be arbitrarily set.

In the expectation-increasing effect, the character indicated by the character partial image may be changed. In 91AKS16 and 91AKS17 of the expectation-increasing production process shown in FIGS. 17-22, the character indicated by the character panel image being displayed is specified according to the target notice number, and the character is changed based on the specified result. It is also possible to determine whether or not to change the character, and to determine the character after the change if the character is to be changed. In this case, the changed character may be determined so as to have a higher probability of winning and a higher degree of advantage in the special state than the character shown in the character panel image being displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate display effect that enhances the expectation of the player when the display mode of the character panel image changes, and raises the attention of the player.

FIG. 17-26 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect processing (AKS108) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the notice effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the timing AKT11 at which the first notice effect can be started (AKS301). The advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started for the first time at timing AKT11. If it is timing AKT11, 1 is set to the target announcement number (AKS302). The target notice number in the notice effect process is, for example, the notice number of the notice effect to be executed among the notice numbers associated with the storage area of the final change effect data in the final change effect data storage unit AKM02. be.

Next, a notice effect control pattern is selected (AKS303). The notice effect control pattern includes control data for controlling the execution of the notice effect, and a plurality of patterns corresponding to the effect modes of the notice effect may be prepared in advance. After that, control for starting the notice effect is performed (AKS304). As a result, it becomes possible to start execution of the announcement effect related to the character panel image, which is the specific image displayed in the acquisition effect and the expectation increase effect.

If it is not the timing AKT11 in AKS301, it is determined whether or not to end the current announcement effect (AKS305). For example, based on the control data read out from the control pattern for the advance notice effect, if the end of the present notice effect is specified, it may be determined that the present notice effect is finished. If the current advance notice effect is not to be ended, the process is ended. On the other hand, when ending the present notice effect, the target notice number is incremented by 1 (AKS306). After that, it is determined whether or not there is a next notice (AKS307). For example, in the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02, when the final variation performance data for executing the announcement performance is stored in the storage area associated with the announcement number which is the target announcement number, it is determined that there is a next announcement. However, if such final variation performance data is not stored, it may be determined that there is no next notice. If there is a next notice, the processing is returned to the AKS 303 to start the execution of the notice effect corresponding to the target notice number.

If the AKS 307 determines that there is no next notice, control is performed to end the notice effect (AKS 308). At this time, control may be performed to start execution of the loss corresponding effect among the display result corresponding effects when only the loss notice suggesting the loss is executed as the previous notice effect. On the other hand, in the case where a winning notice as a winning suggestion is executed as the advance notice effect, control may be performed to start execution of the winning corresponding effect among the display result corresponding effects. It is only necessary to enable specific notification for notifying that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state by executing the performance corresponding to the loss. It is only necessary to enable specific notification for notifying that the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state by executing the hit corresponding production.

After AKS308, control is performed to stop and display the small symbols (89AKS71). For example, when the special state final variation is a loss, the fixed small symbol determined as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. In addition, when the final variation of the special state is a hit, a temporarily stopped small design using a special design is stopped and displayed in the small design display area 9K. A temporarily stopped small symbol using a special symbol is determined by 89AKS20 of the small symbol determining process shown in FIG. 17-9. In this way, when controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state based on the variable display as the special state final change, a special display result is formed during the variable display in the variable display. A temporary stop small pattern using a special pattern is temporarily stopped. In this case, after the notice effect is completed, a specific notification for notifying that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state by the winning corresponding effect included in the display result corresponding effect etc. After execution, the determined small symbols of the winning combination may be stopped and displayed as the last stop symbol in the variable display of the small symbols. By temporarily stopping the temporarily stopped small symbols and then stopping and displaying the fixed small symbols of the winning combination, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which variation display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and the final variation. To increase the player's attention to various performances included in the performance, and to enable an appropriate display performance to improve amusement in a game.

In 89AKS20 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9, a temporary stop small symbol that does not use a special symbol may be determined. In this case, the 89AKS 71 controls to stop and display a temporarily stopped small symbol that does not use a special symbol in the small symbol display area 9K corresponding to the end of the advance notice effect. In this case, after the end of the advance notice performance, the determined small symbols of the winning combination are stop-displayed as the final stop symbols in the variable display of the small symbols in response to the end of the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state. All you have to do is By temporarily stopping temporary stop small patterns that do not use special patterns, it is possible to prevent a player from recognizing at an early stage that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big winning game state or a small winning game state, thereby achieving an advantage. Appropriate display effect that maintains the expectation for the state is possible.

When all of the fluctuation displays corresponding to the special state final fluctuation and the second reserved memory are lost, a loss notice suggesting a loss is executed in all the notice effects. In this case, under the control of the 89AKS 71, the fixed small symbols of the losing combination determined as the final stop symbols are stop-displayed in the small symbol display area 9K in correspondence with the last notice performance. In this way, when a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed in all of the notice effects, by stopping and displaying the fixed small symbols of the losing combination, the player is given the impression that the variable display is highly interlocked with the notice effect. Appropriate display effects that increase the player's interest in advance notice effects and variable displays are made possible.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12, a winning notice number is determined according to the variable display of winning variation. As a result, when the final variation of the special state becomes a hit variation and is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state, or one of the variation display for the second reserved memory becomes a hit change, the big win game state or the small win game state. In the case of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a game state, it is possible to suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state by executing a winning notice as a winning suggestion by one of a plurality of notice effects.

In 90AKS03 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, the number of executions of advance notice when losing is determined. Thereby, when the special state final variation is not the winning variation but is controlled to an advantageous state such as the big winning game state or the small winning gaming state, and the variation display for the second retention storage is not the winning variation and the specific retention information is not stored. , it is possible to suggest that the control is not in an advantageous state by executing a loss notice that is a loss suggestion by all of the plurality of notice effects.

FIG. 17-27 shows a configuration example AKY01 of the announcement effect control pattern. In the advance notice effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-26, the notice effect control pattern to be used corresponding to the present notice effect is selected from among the notice effect control patterns prepared by the AKS 303 . In the configuration example AKY01, selection is possible according to the notice number indicated by the target notice number, the character indicated by the final change effect data stored in the final change effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with this notice number, and the content of the notice. A plurality of patterns are prepared in advance as an advance notice effect control pattern. For example, if the notice number is 1 and the content of the notice is a hit indication, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA1-1 to CPA1-5 can be selected according to the character shown on the character panel image. If the notice number is 2 and the content of the notice is a hit indication, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA2-1 to CPA2-5 can be selected according to the character shown on the character panel image. If the notice number is 3 and the content of the notice is an indication of winning, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA3-1 to CPA3-5 can be selected according to the character shown on the character panel image. If the notice number is 4 and the content of the notice is a hit indication, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA4-1 to CPA4-5 can be selected according to the character shown on the character panel image. If the notice number is 5 and the content of the notice is a hit indication, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA5-1 to CPA5-5 can be selected according to the character shown on the character panel image. Further, if the notice number is 1 and the notice content indicates a failure, one of the notice effect control patterns CPB1-1 to CPB1-5 can be selected according to the character displayed on the character panel image. If the notice number is 2 and the content of the notice indicates a failure, one of the notice effect control patterns CPB2-1 to CPB2-5 can be selected according to the character displayed on the character panel image. If the notice number is 3 and the content of the notice indicates a failure, one of the notice effect control patterns CPB3-1 to CPB3-5 can be selected according to the character displayed on the character panel image. If the notice number is 4 and the content of the notice indicates a failure, one of the notice effect control patterns CPB4-1 to CPB4-5 can be selected according to the character displayed on the character panel image. If the notice number is 5 and the content of the notice indicates a failure, one of the notice effect control patterns CPB5-1 to CPB5-5 can be selected according to the character displayed on the character panel image.

In this way, in the configuration example AKY01, the notice number corresponding to the number of executions of the notice effect, the character indicated by the character panel image that will be the friendly character in the notice effect, and whether the notice effect is a hit suggestion or a loss suggestion. By selecting an announcement effect control pattern corresponding to the above, it is possible to execute an announcement effect with a different effect mode. Also, by selecting a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the character shown in the character panel image and controlling the execution of the notice effect, the character shown in the character panel image can be used as an allied character in the battle effect in the notice effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the advance notice effect in the effect mode related to the character panel image serving as the specific image. It should be noted that the notice effect control pattern is not limited to the configuration example AKY01, and any notice effect control pattern may be used so as to execute the notice effect related to the character panel image serving as the specific image.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value of 4 when the execution of the advance notice effect is started, the advance notice at the time of notice may be executed. The advance notification at the time of advance notice may be a notification mode common to the acquisition promotion notification or the continuation promotion notification, or may be a notification mode different from these. When it is timing AKT11 in AKS301 of the advance notice effect processing shown in FIGS. If it is not the upper limit value, it is sufficient that the advanced notice at the time of advance notice can be executed by display of effect images, sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of movable objects, or a combination of some or all of these.

FIGS. 17-28 and 17-29 show display examples after the expectation-increasing effect is finished. When the expectation-increasing effect ends, the effect image showing the enemy character starts to be displayed, as in a display example AK101 shown in FIG. 17-28(A). In the display example AK101, the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect or the expectation-increasing effect is reduced and displayed at a predetermined position on the screen of the effect display device 9, such as the lower right part of the screen. Next, in the display example AK102 shown in FIG. 17-28(B), the first announcement effect is started corresponding to the timing AKT11. At this time, the display of the character panel image related to the current preview effect, such as the leftmost character panel image among the plurality of character panel images, is erased. Along with this, the progress of the battle effect of the advance notice effect in which the character indicated by the erased character panel image becomes an ally character starts. When the advance notice effect is executed, every time the action of the player that is the pressing operation of the push button 120 is detected, the display of the character panel image is erased and the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. A battle production may progress. Through these display controls, the player can recognize that the announcement effect related to the character panel image will be executed. Then, in the display example AK103 shown in FIG. 17-28(C), a scene in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed, so that a failure notice suggesting failure is executed.

After that, even in the second to fourth announcement effects, the battle effects of the announcement effects in which the characters indicated by the character panel images that are sequentially erased are allied characters are progressed. In the series of display examples shown in FIGS. 17-28, in the first to fourth advance notice effects, a scene in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed, so that a loss notice suggesting a loss is executed. Subsequently, in the display example AK104 shown in FIG. 17-28(D), the fifth advance notice effect is started corresponding to the timing AKT15. Also at this time, the progress of the battle effect of the advance notice effect in which the character indicated by the erased character panel image becomes an ally character is started. Then, in the display example AK105 shown in FIG. 17-28(E), by displaying a scene in which the teammate character wins, a winning notice as a hint of winning is executed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed by 89AKS33 or 89AKS36 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIGS. 17-21 is stopped and displayed.

Following the execution of the winning announcement, the winning corresponding effect is started in the display example AK106 shown in FIG. 17-28(F). In the hit-corresponding display, even after the final change of the special state is finished, the reproduction display of the moving image or the animation display of the still image is continuously executed in the display of the background image. For example, in the display example AK107 shown in FIG. 17-28 (G), the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 9K corresponds to the variable display of the holding number 1 in the second holding memory at the end of the special state. be started. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the win correspondence display, etc. is continuously performed. In the display example AK108 shown in FIG. 17-28(H), the final small symbol to be stopped is stopped and displayed corresponding to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed by 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK109 shown in FIG. 17-28(I), the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the holding number 2 in the second holding memory at the end of the special state. be. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the win correspondence display and the like are continuously executed. In the display example AK110 shown in FIG. 17-28(J), the final small symbol to be stopped is stopped and displayed corresponding to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed by 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK111 shown in FIG. 17-29(A), the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the holding number 3 in the second holding memory at the end of the special state. be. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the win correspondence display, etc. is continuously performed. In the display example AK112 shown in FIG. 17-29(B), when the variable display ends, the final stop small symbol is stop-displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed by 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed. In the display example AK113 shown in FIG. 17-29(C), the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the holding number 4 in the second holding memory at the end of the special state. be. At this time, the variable display result is determined to be one of the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 corresponding to "hit". In addition, in 89AKS53 of the effect symbol variation start setting process shown in FIG. The display of the production pattern returns to the normal display state by setting . In addition, when the special state final variation is started, the display of the production pattern is set to a non-display state by the setting of 89AKS52, and the production pattern is not displayed. As a result, in the display example AK113, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. After that, in the display example AK114 shown in FIG. 17-29(D), the confirmed effect symbol and the confirmed small symbol, which are the final stop symbols, are stop-displayed corresponding to the end of the variable display. In this way, in the variable display based on the specific hold information, it is possible to notify that the control is performed in an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state in a manner different from the specific notification by the hit corresponding production such as the display result of the production pattern. is. In addition, it is not limited to the display result of the production pattern, and the display of the production image different from the production pattern or the production image in the winning corresponding production, the sound output, the lamp lighting, the movable object operation, or a combination of some or all of these It is only necessary to be able to notify that the game is controlled in an advantageous state in an arbitrary mode different from the advance notice effect and the hit-corresponding effect.

When the advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times, in the small symbol display area 9K, each time the advance notice effect is executed, the small patterns are stopped and displayed so that the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode. good. For example, in the display examples AK101 and AK102, the small patterns having the same drawing number as the left pattern and the right pattern are temporarily stopped in the small pattern display area 9K. Also in the display example AK104, the small symbols having the same symbol number as the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. In the display example AK103, the temporarily stopped small symbols may be changed again in response to the end of the advance notice effect. In this way, by giving the player the impression of being in a ready-to-win state each time the notice effect is executed, the player's expectation for the notice effect is heightened, and an appropriate display effect that enhances the amusement of the game becomes possible. .

In the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 17-7, when 89AKS51 is the special state final variation, 89AKS52 is set to a non-display state in which the effect symbol is not displayed. During the execution of the variable display that becomes the special state final change, the acquisition effect included in the final change effect, the expectation level increase effect, the one or more advance notice effect, the loss corresponding effect or the winning corresponding effect, etc. , various productions are executed. In this case, by making a non-display state in which the production pattern is not displayed, the player can easily recognize various productions included in the final variable production, and an appropriate display production that raises the player's attention to the production can be performed. be possible. After that, the performance symbol non-display state continues until it is determined in 89AKS53 of the performance symbol variation start processing that it is not the variation pattern PD1-1. Therefore, after the final variable performance including the notice performance that is a hit notice that is a hit suggestion is executed, if the variable display is lost based on the hold information that is different from the specific hold information, the performance pattern is in a non-display state. As a variable display of the small pattern is performed. Then, when the variation display is a win based on the specific hold information, since it is determined to be one of the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 different from the variation pattern PD1-1, the effect pattern is set to the normal display state. While returning, variable display of the small pattern is performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the "hit" as the variable display result, so that it is possible to reliably notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state. Appropriate display effects are possible.

In the small symbol change setting process shown in FIGS. 17-21, there may be cases where the medium symbol is not changed to the special symbol by the 89AKS33. In this case, even if the specific suspension information is included in the suspension information to be the second suspension storage at the end of the special state, in the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state, the final combination of losing combinations without using special symbols is determined. The pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, in the variable display based on the specific hold information, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state in a manner different from the specific notification by the hit corresponding production such as the display result of the production pattern. is. In this way, even when the specific hold information is stored, by deriving the display result without using the special pattern in the special state final variation, it is possible to control to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the situation at an early stage and to perform an appropriate display performance to keep the player's expectation for the advantageous state.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

Various performances included in the final variation performance are different from the special state final variation, instead of being executable in response to the special state final variation, or together with being executable in response to the special state final variation. There may be cases where it can be executed corresponding to the display. For example, in the normal state, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern, the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state for a relatively long opening change period, and the second start winning may occur easily. may When the number of second reserved memories reaches a specific value due to the occurrence of such a second start winning, the same effects as the various effects included in the final variable effect can be executed along with the execution of the special variable display. may Using not only the reservation information serving as the second reservation storage, but also the reservation information serving as the first reservation storage, it may be possible to execute the same effects as the various effects included in the final variable production.

In addition, in the normal state, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed as a specific ready-to-win effect, the display result of the special pattern becomes a big hit pattern, and when the big win occurs, the temporary stop small pattern using the special small pattern is temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then changed again to derive a fixed small pattern of a winning combination. For example, in 89AKS19 of the small pattern determination process shown in FIG. 17-9, if it is a variation pattern with a specific reach effect that can be selected in the normal state other than the variation pattern PC3-3, the process is changed to 89AKS20. It suffices to proceed and determine a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol. In this way, by temporarily stopping the small symbols that become special symbols, the display result of the special symbols becomes a big winning symbol, and it may be possible to suggest that a big winning will occur.

In the small pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 17-19, when the variation pattern PC3-3 is determined by 89AKS19, the temporary stop small pattern using special symbols is determined by 89AKS20 regardless of the winning type. . On the other hand, if the winning type is the specific type, the small symbols using the special symbols may not be temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, when the hit type is the second special big hit, the fixed small pattern of the winning combination is displayed without determining the temporarily stopped small pattern by 89AKS20 and without temporarily stopping and displaying the small pattern using the special pattern. It may be derived. Whether or not to temporarily stop and display a small pattern using a special pattern in the case where the hit type is the second special figure big hit, in the case of the variation pattern PC3-3 and in the case of the variation pattern other than PC3-3 can be different. In addition, depending on whether or not a combination of winning types and variation patterns, or a condition different from the combination of winning types and variation patterns, is established, whether or not to temporarily stop and display small symbols using special symbols is changed. good too.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, even if there is a variation display of the winning effect, even if there is a winning effect that suggests a winning result, even if it is determined without a winning notice, good. In this case, it may be suggested or notified that a big win or a small win will occur by executing the resurrection effect after the execution of the advance notice effect of the loss prediction suggesting the loss.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured such that the winning probability and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, it is sufficient that the winning probability and the rate of winning a ball are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win or a small win. Become. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the probability of winning a big win or a small win changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win or a small win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win gaming state may change according to the set value. The winning probability of the small win is constant regardless of the set value, whereas the winning probability of the big win may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 31 side to the effect control board 80 side.

During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. For example, the effect symbol variation start process of the effect control process process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be a process capable of determining a combination of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbols. In the stop symbol determination process, when the super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, it may be determined that the setting suggesting effect can be executed at a predetermined rate based on the determination of any ready-to-win symbol. The ready-to-win pattern is the same effect pattern that is stop-displayed with the left pattern and the right pattern coinciding among the final stop pattern at the time of the reach losing and the final stop pattern at the time of the big hit.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined ready-to-win symbol is the effect symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not there is a setting suggesting effect. Whether the setting suggestion effect is to be executed or not is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution decision table prepared in advance based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. good. The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the symbol display color is not changed. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1, it is sufficient that the symbol display color can be changed at a predetermined rate. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is the effect pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed or not. Depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine, whether or not the symbol display color is changed to a specific color is different as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is the effect symbol corresponding to the number 7. good too.

The setting suggesting effect is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern instead of changing the pattern display color, which is the display color of the effect pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, or in addition to changing the pattern display color. Any aspect of the ready-to-win mode, such as the shape and pattern of the performance pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, it is intended to change the rendering mode of any rendering device, such as display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary rendering images, sound output, lamp lighting, movable object movement, or a combination of some or all of these. may Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation of winning by any desired effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to the effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed. You may enable it to make a suggestion. It may be an effect that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 after suggesting the control of the big win game state or the small win game state during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state or the small win game state, the case where the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state or the small win game state is continuously made, or It may include the case where the suggestion regarding the control of the small winning game state is continuously performed and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after suggesting the control of the big win game state or the minor win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state or the minor win game state is continued. It may include a case of performing and suggesting a setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether or not the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the big win game state and the small win game state may be made, while suggestions concerning the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes a big win or a small win, execution of a winning start production (fanfare production) or a winning medium production (small winning middle production, production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Along with this, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the big-hit game state or the small-hit game state.

Instead of a part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the big winning game state or the small winning game state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the big winning game state or the small winning game state, the big winning game state or the small winning game state It may also suggest a control of a state that is advantageous to a player different from the . For example, it may suggest a special state to be controlled after the end of the big-hit game state or the small-hit game state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 89AK)
A game machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, including a hold storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as hold information, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state. and a reduced variable display means capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information in a form smaller than the identification information, wherein the specific notification execution means A specific notification can be executed in relation to the specific variable display in the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means when the specific variable display is being executed, for notifying that the specific variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state when the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display and is controlled to the advantageous state is not stored in the reserve storage means A predetermined display result can be derived as a display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means after the specific notification is executed and the specific variable display is completed, and based on the specific variable display When specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to an advantageous state, a specific notification is executed for notifying that the control is made to an advantageous state in the specific variable display, and after the specific variable display is completed. part of the reduced identification information that constitutes the predetermined display result and the reduced identification information that constitutes the predetermined display result as the display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the reservation information different from the specific reservation information stored in the reservation storage means of A special display result composed of special identification information not included in the identification information can be derived, and it is possible to notify in a manner different from the specific notification that the variable display based on the specific hold information is controlled to an advantageous state. and the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous state, and when controlled to the second advantageous state, the display result of the identification information , a specific display result composed only of the specific identification information is derived, and the reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information. Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The specific notification may be, for example, an advance notice effect, a display result corresponding effect, or the like. The specific notification execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108 and the display result corresponding effect process of step AKS110. The reduced identification information may be, for example, a small pattern. The reduction variable display means may be, for example, the small pattern display area 9K of the effect display device 9 or the like. The predetermined display result may be, for example, a final stop symbol of a losing combination. The special display result may be, for example, a final stop symbol using a special symbol representing the letter V, or the like. The first advantageous state may be, for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot C, or the like. The second advantageous state may be, for example, the first special figure jackpot A, the first special figure jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, or any one of the small hit via jackpots X to Z. The specific identification information may be, for example, red 7 production pattern and small pattern, gold 7 production pattern and small pattern, or the like.
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

When controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a specific variable display, in the specific variable display, the special display result is temporarily stopped, and the specific display result is executed after executing the specific notification for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state. may be derivable. For example, steps 89AKS19 and 89AKS20 may be executed.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

The special display result may be derived in different manners depending on whether it is derived in the specific variable display or in the variable display after the specific variable display is completed. For example, when determining the final stop pattern at step AKS011, if it is a variation pattern PC1-3, it is determined to be a reach losing combination, and if it is a variation pattern PD1-1, it is determined to be a non-reach combination. After determining the small pattern, if steps 89AKS16 to 89AKS18 are executed, steps 89AKS32 to 89AKS35 are executed, and so on.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means; and special state termination means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, wherein the specific variable display is performed as the final variable display in the special state. is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display and the specific hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, the predetermined display result of the normal mode different from the reach mode is derived in the final variable display, and hold storage In the variable display based on the pending information stored in the means, a predetermined display result is derived as the display result of the reduced identification information, and when controlled in an advantageous state based on the final variable display, in the final variable display A specified result is derived, and when control is not performed to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round and specific hold information is stored in a hold storage means, it is notified that the variable display of the final round will be controlled to an advantageous state. execution of a specific notification to perform the specific reservation, derives a special display result as a display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the reservation information different from the specific reservation information stored in the reservation storage means, and derives the special display result as the display result of the reduced identification information, and the variable display based on the specific reservation information. may derive a specific display result. Here, the first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. Deriving the display result of the normal mode different from the ready-to-win mode may be performed, for example, when determining the final stop symbol in step AKS011 and determining the non-ready-to-win combination even for the variation patterns PC1-3. Deriving the display result of the specific mode in the final variable display is, for example, when determining the final stop pattern in step AKS011, if it is determined to be a jackpot combination corresponding to the variation pattern PC3-3. good.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, the hold storage is performed after executing the specific effect suggesting that the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. In the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the means, the identification information is in a non-display state and the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and in the variable display based on the specific hold information, the identification information is reduced to the normal display state. The identification information may be variably displayed. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, the final variable effect. The identification information may be set to the non-display state, for example, when step 89AKS52 is executed. Setting the identification information to the normal display state may be performed, for example, when step 89AKS55 is executed.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

The variable display based on the reservation information different from the specific reservation information stored in the reservation storage means is a variable display from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived, rather than the specific variable display when not controlled to an advantageous state. The time may be short. Here, the short variable display time may be, for example, that the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PD1-1 is 500 ms.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the specific variable display is provided, the specific effect executing means can continuously execute the specific effect a plurality of times, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display. Or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to suggest that it is controlled to an advantageous state by one of a plurality of specific effects, and it is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display When the specific suspension information is not first stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to suggest that control is not performed in an advantageous state by all of a plurality of specific performances, and by all of a plurality of specific performances, control is performed in an advantageous state. When it is suggested not to display, a predetermined display result may be derived corresponding to the last specific effect. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The case where it is possible to suggest that the game is controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a case in which the announcement performance is executed as a winning announcement that the announcement content is a winning announcement. In the case where it is possible to suggest that the control will not be in an advantageous state, for example, it is possible to execute a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. Deriving the predetermined display result corresponding to the final specific effect may be, for example, stopping display of the small pattern by executing step 89AKS71.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

The special identification information may not be included in the displayable identification information during variable display. For example, the V symbol with the symbol number "10" may be used as a suggestion for a special end.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, after deriving the predetermined display result as the display result of the reduced identification information in the specific variable display, the variable display based on the specific hold information is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be notified in a manner different from the specific notification. For example, it is sufficient if the small pattern change setting process of step 89AKS03 is not executed.
Appropriate display control is possible in such a configuration.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 90AK)
A game machine capable of performing variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information; A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means, special state termination means for ending the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state, , the effect execution means includes a preliminary effect execution means capable of executing a preliminary effect for displaying a specific image of the display number related to the number of pending information stored in the pending storage means; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect, wherein the specific effect executing means reserves specific suspension information related to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round. When not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting not to be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of displays of the specific image, and control to an advantageous state based on the final variable display. or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images, The final variable display is performed when the specified suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, and the number of times of the variable display executed before the variable display based on the specified suspension information is the first number and the second number. In both cases, the variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common, and the specific effect related to any of the specific images displayed in the preliminary effect is controlled to an advantageous state. The degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether is suggested. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect processing of step 89AKS02. The pre-performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS104, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a winning notice. That the variable display time is common may be, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The difference in the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, when the winning announcement character is determined according to determination example 90AKD11.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control is possible.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of performing variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information; A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means, special state termination means for ending the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state, , the effect execution means includes a preliminary effect execution means capable of executing a preliminary effect for displaying a specific image of the display number related to the number of pending information stored in the pending storage means; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect, wherein the specific effect executing means reserves specific suspension information related to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round. When not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting not to be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of displays of the specific image, and control to an advantageous state based on the final variable display. or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images, The final variable display is performed when the specified suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, and the number of times of the variable display executed before the variable display based on the specified suspension information is the first number and the second number. In both cases, the variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the shooting of the game medium toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotion performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the upper limit number that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is changed. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect to display the same display number of specific images as the upper limit number, and execution of the preliminary effect is performed in a state where the hold information is not stored up to the upper limit number. At the time of starting, whether or not the game medium passes through the starting area, the pre-rendering is performed to display the number of specific images to be displayed according to the number of storage of the hold information. It can be executed, special performance can be executed after a specific image is displayed in preliminary performance, and special performance is not executed when suspension information is not stored up to the upper limit number. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect processing of step 89AKS02. The pre-performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS104, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a winning notice. That the variable display time is common may be, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed if, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit of the number of pending information that can be stored is, for example, according to determination example 91AKD01, if the second pending storage number is 4, the number of acquired items is determined to be 5 and executed. It's okay if it's a performance. For example, if the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the number of acquired items equal to or greater than the second reserved memory number is determined according to example 91AKD01 of determination example 91AKD01. It may be an acquisition effect or the like that is executed. The special effect may be, for example, an expectation-increasing effect. The special effect may not be executed if, for example, the expectation-increasing effect is prohibited by steps 91AKS12 and 91AKS13.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control is possible.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of performing variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information; A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means, special state termination means for ending the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state, , the effect execution means includes a preliminary effect execution means capable of executing a preliminary effect for displaying a specific image of the display number related to the number of pending information stored in the pending storage means; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect, wherein the specific effect executing means reserves specific suspension information related to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round. When not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting not to be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of displays of the specific image, and control to an advantageous state based on the final variable display. or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images, The final variable display is performed when the specified suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, and the number of times of the variable display executed before the variable display based on the specified suspension information is the first number and the second number. In both cases, the variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the shooting of the game medium toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotion performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the upper limit number that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is changed. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, the specific images are displayed. It is possible to execute a change effect of changing the display mode, and in the change effect, when the game medium passes through the start area, the display mode of the specific image is changed, and the start area is changed to the game medium. When the technique medium does not pass, the display mode of the specific image is changed when the change performance ends. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect processing of step 89AKS02. The pre-performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS104, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a winning notice. That the variable display time is common may be, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed if, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit of the number of pending information that can be stored is, for example, according to determination example 91AKD01, if the second pending storage number is 4, the number of acquired items is determined to be 5 and executed. It's okay if it's a performance. The change effect may be, for example, an expectation-increasing effect. Changing the display mode of the specific image when the change effect ends may be, for example, executing the expectation level increase effect when the expectation level increase condition 92AKC02 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control is possible.

A game machine capable of performing variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information; A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means, special state termination means for ending the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state, , the effect execution means includes a preliminary effect execution means capable of executing a preliminary effect for displaying a specific image of the display number related to the number of pending information stored in the pending storage means; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect, wherein the specific effect executing means reserves specific suspension information related to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round. When not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting not to be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of displays of the specific image, and control to an advantageous state based on the final variable display. or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images, The final variable display is performed when the specified suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, and the number of times of the variable display executed before the variable display based on the specified suspension information is the first number and the second number. In both cases, the variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the shooting of the game medium toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotion performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the upper limit number that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is changed. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, the specific images are displayed. A change effect for changing the display mode can be executed, and in the change effect, the specific image may be changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect processing of step 89AKS02. The pre-performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS104, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a winning notice. That the variable display time is common may be, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed if, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit of the number of pending information that can be stored is, for example, according to determination example 91AKD01, if the second pending storage number is 4, the number of acquired items is determined to be 5 and executed. It's okay if it's a performance. The change effect may be, for example, an expectation-increasing effect. Changing the specific image to a predetermined display mode in the change effect may be, for example, executing the expectation increase effect when the expectation increase condition 92AKC01 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control is possible.

A game machine capable of performing variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information; A starting winning means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which a game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than in the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is easily changed to the second state. special state control means, special state termination means for ending the special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed in the special state, effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state, , the effect execution means includes a preliminary effect execution means capable of executing a preliminary effect for displaying a specific image of the display number related to the number of pending information stored in the pending storage means; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect, wherein the specific effect executing means reserves specific suspension information related to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round. When not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting not to be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of displays of the specific image, and control to an advantageous state based on the final variable display. or when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images, The final variable display is performed when the specified suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, and the number of times of the variable display executed before the variable display based on the specified suspension information is the first number and the second number. In both cases, the variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the shooting of the game medium toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotion performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the upper limit number that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is changed. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, the specific images are displayed. It is possible to execute a change effect of changing the display mode, and in the change effect, when the game medium passes through the start area, the display mode of the specific image is changed, and the start area is changed to the game medium. When the skill medium does not pass, it is not necessary to execute the change effect. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The reserved storage means may be, for example, a second reserved storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 or the like. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect processing of step 89AKS02. The pre-performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS104, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, an advance notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect processing of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, an advance notice effect in which the content of the notice is a winning notice. That the variable display time is common may be, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed if, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit of the number of pending information that can be stored is, for example, according to determination example 91AKD01, if the second pending storage number is 4, the number of acquired items is determined to be 5 and executed. It's okay if it's a performance. The change effect may be, for example, an expectation-increasing effect. Not executing the change effect when the game medium does not pass through the starting area may be, for example, executing the expectation level increasing effect when the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC03 is set.

(Description on problem-solving means and effects common to characteristic portions 90AK to 92AK)
The preliminary effect executing means is capable of executing a preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of the pending information that can be stored in the pending storage means, and the specific effect executing means is capable of executing the number of displays displayed in the preliminary effect. can be sequentially executed, and the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display based on the specific suspension information is the third number, the specific effect corresponding to the third number of times It may be possible to suggest that the control is in an advantageous state by a specific effect related to a specific image preceding the image. Here, the preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of storable pending information may be, for example, an acquisition effect when the number of acquired characters is determined to be "5". The fact that the specific effects can be sequentially executed may be, for example, the case of executing the advance notice effects that are started at timings AKT11 to AKT15. The specific effect related to the specific image before the specific image corresponding to the third number may be, for example, the notice effect of the winning notice number determined by the decision example 90AKD01.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

The preliminary effect executing means may be capable of executing the passage notification effect based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area during the execution of the preliminary effect. For example, it may be the case of executing a winning notification effect in steps 90AKS08 and 90AKS09.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

The preliminary effect execution means may sequentially display the specific images at a predetermined timing when the suspension information is stored up to the upper limit number that can be stored in the suspension storage means. For example, it may be the case that the obtained effect is executed at the obtained character increase timing set in step 90AKS19.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

It may be possible to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the specific image as the game medium passes through the starting area. Here, the change effect may be, for example, an expectation-increasing effect.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

Among the specific images, when the first image that can suggest that the related specific effect is controlled in an advantageous state is displayed, as the specific image after the first image, A second image having a low rate of being controlled in an advantageous state may be displayed. For example, it is sufficient if the effect image showing the character determined in steps 90AKS15 and 90AKS16 is displayed.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

When execution of the specific effect is started, it may be possible to execute a special notification effect for notifying that the maximum number of pieces of pending information that can be stored in the pending storage means is not stored. For example, when the acquisition promotion notification is executed in step AKS203, the notification mode may be changed when the second reserved storage number is less than the upper limit number.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control is possible.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 095AK)
The characteristic portion 095AK according to this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 18-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table regarding the characteristic portion 095AK. FIG. 18-1(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure hit determination table regarding the characteristic part 095AK. These tables are stored in the ROM54. In the characteristic portion 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9, in response to the fact that the value indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, in step S61, the value shown in FIG. Instead of the first special figure hit determination table, the first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (A) is used to perform big hit determination for the first special symbol. In addition, in the characteristic portion 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the fact that the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", in step S61, the second special symbol shown in FIG. Instead of the hit determination table, the second special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B) is used to perform the big hit determination and the small hit determination for the second special symbol.

The first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (A) may be set with a big hit determination value to be compared with the value of random R which is a random number for hit determination. In the first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1(A), the big hit determination value is set so that the big hit is determined at a rate of 1/199. The second special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B) may be set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the value of random R which is a random number for hit determination. In the second special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), the big hit determination value is set so that the big hit is determined at a rate of 1/199, and the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/5. A small hit judgment value is set so that it will be done.

FIG. 18-2 shows a hit type table for the feature part 095AK. The hit type table shows, for each hit type, conditions for generating a hit, control state after a hit, number of openings, and the like. The post-hit control state is a game state that can be controlled after the jackpot game state ends. The number of times of opening indicates the number of times of execution of rounds (round games) as a jackpot game, including the opening time in each round. In the winning type table shown in FIG. 18-2, the winning types are the first special big win X, the first special big win Y, the second special big win X, the second special big win Y, the small win via big win A, and the small win. A jackpot B via a hit is provided.

While the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is open due to a small hit, when the game ball enters the operation opening and enters the V prize area 870 inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (V prize winning), A big hit occurs via a small hit. The big win via small win includes a big win A via a small win and a big win B via a small win according to a plurality of types of big win game states with different post-win control states. After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times ( 8R) A jackpot to be released. In the "number of times of opening" in FIG. 18-2, the case where the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened corresponding to the small winning game state is indicated by "V winning device", and the V judgment corresponding to the big winning game state A case where the operation opening of the winning device 87 is opened as a V big winning opening is indicated by "V big winning opening".

A big hit that occurs directly by the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is also called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes the first special symbol jackpot X and the first special symbol jackpot Y according to the jackpot game state controllable based on the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol (first identification information). A second special figure jackpot X and a second special figure jackpot Y are included according to the jackpot gaming state that can be controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol (second identification information). The first special big win X, the first special big win Y, the second special big win X, and the second special big win Y are all big wins in which the big winning opening is opened eight times.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Includes a jackpot via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot controlled to a time-saving state (specific state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is also called a time-saving jackpot.

The time saving state is a state in which the high base control is performed and the time saving control is performed. That is, the time saving state is a special state in which time saving control is performed. In the time-saving state, high base control is performed, so that the winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs at a higher rate than in the normal state, and the variable display of the second special symbol occurs at a higher rate than in the normal state. Executed (variation display of the second special symbol is easier to execute than in the normal state). In addition, in the time-saving state, since the time-saving control is performed, it is more likely than in the normal state that an effective starting prize is generated, and the possibility of a jackpot game being performed is increased. That is, the time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player. During the time-saving state, the player plays a game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning hole 14 by striking to the right. In addition, in this Embodiment, right-handed promotion alerting|reporting is performed during a time saving state.

In addition, the normal state is a game state different from a game state advantageous to the player, such as a big win game state, a small win game state, a time saving state, and a probability variable state described later, and the display result in the normal symbol variation display is "hit". and the probability that the display result in the variable display of the special symbols will be a "jackpot", etc. are in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return process after turning on the power is not executed).

In the post-hit control state of the first special figure jackpot X, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. In the post-hit control state of the first special figure jackpot Y, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. In the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. In the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot Y, the time saving state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbols is performed 99 times. In the post-hit control state of the big hit A via the small hit, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. In the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. In this way, after the big win game state is finished, the number of variable display times of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving state is set to the number of times corresponding to the winning type, such as 1 time or 99 times. If a big hit occurs based on the variable display of special symbols before the time-saving state ends, after the big-hit game state ends, the time-saving state will continue until the number of variable display times of the special symbols corresponding to the type of hit. controllable.

In the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a higher rate than in the normal state, and in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in the second special symbol determination table of FIG. 18-1 (B) Secondly, it is configured to be controllable to a small win that generates a big win based on the V prize. Therefore, the greater the number of variable display times that can be executed in the time-saving state as the post-hit control state, the more likely it will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a big-hit game state or a small-hit game state in which a big win occurs based on the V winning. is high. In the setting of the hit type shown in FIG. 18-2, when the hit type is the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit via the big hit B, when the hit type is the second special figure big hit X or the small hit via the big hit A In comparison, when the post-win control state is a time saving state, the number of times of variable display that can be executed is large, and a big win with a high possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state is generated. Thus, in the present embodiment, after being controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state (after the control to the advantageous state is completed), the second special figure big hit X or the small hit via big hit A after-hit control state (after-hit control state in which it is possible to continue the time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed once), and after-hit control state to be the first state, and the second special figure jackpot Y Or after a hit control state of the big hit B via a small hit (a post-hit control state in which the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times), it is controlled to be in a more advantageous state than the first state. It is configured so as to be controllable in a post-hit control state that is highly likely to be the second state.

In the post-hit control state of the second special symbol jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the minor jackpot, the time saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times, and in the time shortening state, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. It is executed at a higher rate than in the normal state, and in the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of 1/5, as shown in the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 18-1 (B). do. Therefore, the player does not shoot the game ball when the second special figure big win Y or the big win B via the small win is controlled to the big win game state, and after the big win game state is finished, the control state is controlled to the time-saving state as the post-win control state. Except when the player hits left and when the player hits right, a small win always occurs before the time-saving state ends, and a big win occurs based on the V winning during the small win. . Therefore, when the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the jackpot, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, after the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving state as the post-hit control state after the jackpot game state is completed. By being controlled to the big win game state based on the V prize, it is substantially determined that the game is controlled to the big win game state twice.

FIG. 18-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure jackpot type determination table regarding the feature part 095AK. FIG. 18-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure jackpot type determination table regarding the characteristic portion 095AK. FIG. 18-3 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit via big-hit type determination table regarding the characteristic portion 095AK. These tables are stored in the ROM54. In the characteristic part 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. , Instead of the first special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (C), the first special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. Using a special figure big hit type determination table, a hit type is determined when a big hit is determined by the first special symbol. In addition, in the characteristic part 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined to be a big hit, and in response to the fact that the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", in step S74, FIG. D) instead of the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B) to select the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The determination table is used to determine the hit type when the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit. In addition, in the characteristic portion 095AK, in response to the fact that it is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, in step S79, instead of the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (C) selects the big hit via small hit type determination table shown in 18-3 (C), hit when it is determined to be a small hit by the second special symbol using the selected small hit via big hit type determination table in step S80 Determine the type.

First special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B), small hit via jackpot type shown in FIG. 18-3 (C) Each determination table may be set with a hit type determination value to be compared with a value of random 1, which is a random number for determination of a hit type. The hit type determination value in the first special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3(A) may be set corresponding to the first special figure big hit X and the first special figure big hit Y respectively. In the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), the first special figure jackpot X is determined at a rate of 99/100, and the first special figure jackpot Y is determined at a rate of 1/100. As shown, the hit type determination value is set. The hit type determination value in the second special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B) may be set corresponding to the second special figure big hit X and the second special figure big hit Y respectively. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B), the second special figure jackpot X is determined at a rate of 99/100, and the second special figure jackpot Y is determined at a rate of 1/100. As shown, the hit type determination value is set. The hit type determination value in the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. It suffices if it is set corresponding to each of the big hits B. In the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (C), when the game state is the normal state, the small hit via big hit A is determined at a rate of 1/100, and the small hit at a rate of 99/100. When it is determined to be a via-jack B and the gaming state is a time-saving state, a hit is determined to be a minor via-via-jack A at a ratio of 99/100 and a via-sub-jack B to be determined at a ratio of 1/100. Type judgment value is set.

FIG. 18-4 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern with respect to the characteristic portion 095AK. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 18-4 is prepared in advance so that it can be used instead of part or all of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-3, or along with part or all of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-3 It would be nice if it was prepared. A plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. 18-4 are different from each other in variable display mode of special figure variation time and production design.

FIG. 18-5 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern according to the game state and the like regarding the characteristic portion 095AK. In the characteristic part 095AK, when the normal state, when the remaining number of times of variation display in the time saving state is 1 or more, when the remaining number of times of the variation display in the time saving state is 0, and when the time saving state ends The setting of the determinable pattern is different between the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reservation memory (holding information regarding the second special symbol) at the time. The remaining number of times of variable display in the time saving state is the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving state. The variation pattern is determined when the variable display of special symbols is started, and the remaining number of variable displays in the time saving state can be specified as the number of variable displays remaining after the start of this variable display. Just do it. For example, in the determinable pattern corresponding to the time saving final variation, which is the final time variation display in the time saving state, the number of remaining variation display times becomes 0 after the start of this time variation display, so in the time saving state A determinable pattern is set when the remaining number of fluctuation display is zero. Note that the current variable display is the variable display being executed, and is also called the relevant change. When the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state is executed, the time saving state is finished and the game state is the normal state. However, for the second reserved storage at the end of the time saving state, a special variation pattern can be determined unlike the variation display in other normal states. Therefore, the setting of the determinable pattern differs between the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the time saving state and the case of the variable display in the other normal state. In addition, since the player plays the game with the right hand during the time saving state, the reserved memory stored at the end of the time saving state is the second reserved memory except for the case where the player hits the left hand. In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-5, when the variable display result is "hit", the hit type is the first special figure jackpot X, the first special figure jackpot Y, the second special figure jackpot X, the second special figure When the display result of the special symbol which is one of the big wins Y is "big win", and when the kind of special symbol is either the big win A via the small win or the big win B via the small win, the display result of the special symbol is "small win". If and is included.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (A), in the determination example 095AKE01 in the case of the normal state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 ˜PA2-3 are included in the determinable pattern. In the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, the mode of variable display of the performance symbols does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a result of the display result of the variable display of the performance symbols, the fixed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are displayed non-reach. included in the variation pattern. In the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, after the mode of variable display of the performance symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, as a display result of the variable display of the performance symbols, the fixed performance symbols of the predetermined ready-to-win combination, which is not the winning combination, are displayed stopped. It is included in the reach variation pattern that is used. During the variable display of the production pattern by any of the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, a normal ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed as a ready-to-win production in response to the ready-to-win state during the variable display of the production pattern. .

In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation patterns PA1-4, by temporarily stopping the performance symbols during the variable display and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo-continuous effect that looks like this is executed. The variable display resumed after temporarily stopping the production pattern is also called pseudo-continuous variation. When the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the variable display is temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode different from that when the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed by temporary stop display of a predetermined pseudo-continuous pattern, and then the variable display is restarted. . In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation patterns PA1-4, the fixed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stop-displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous performance is executed once. Even in the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA2-2, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA2-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of performance symbols by either of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3, after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous performance is executed once or a plurality of times, the mode of variable display of the performance symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode. , Finally, the finalized effect pattern of the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed.

In the determination example 095AKE01, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the determinable patterns. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are hit variation patterns in which fixed performance symbols of a winning combination are displayed in a stopped manner as a display result of variable display of performance symbols after the aspect of variable display of performance symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode. included in During the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, the normal ready-to-win performance is executed as the ready-to-win performance in response to the ready-to-win state during the variable display of the performance symbols. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA3-2, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the performance symbols by the variation pattern PA3-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the performance symbols by either of the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3, after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous performance is executed once or a plurality of times, the mode of variable display of the performance symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode. , Finally, the fixed effect pattern of the winning combination is stopped and displayed.

As for the variation pattern in decision example 095AKE01, when the variable display result is "losing", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of retained memories and the degree of expectation for winning, and the variable display result is "hit". In some cases, a variation pattern is determined as a usage pattern at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of winning. For example, when the number of reserved memories is large, than when the number of reserved memories is small, a non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time may be determined as the usage pattern at a high rate. When the variable display result is "hit", a variation pattern in which the number of pseudo-continuous variations is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "loss" may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is "hit", the variation pattern may be determined to execute the normal ready-to-win effect at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "losing".

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (B), in the determination example 095AKE02 when the remaining number of times of variable display in the time saving state is 1 or more, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", the variation pattern PB1- 1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3 are included in the determinable patterns. The fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3 are included in the non-reach fluctuation patterns. When the remaining number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state is 1 or more, the fluctuation display of the special design is performed by determining the fluctuation pattern with a shorter special figure fluctuation time as the usage pattern at a higher rate than in the normal state. It suffices if it is possible to perform time-saving control in which time is shortened. In decision example 095AKE02, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the determinable patterns, as in decision example 095AKE01. As for the variation pattern in decision example 095AKE02, when the variable display result is "losing", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of retained memories and the degree of expectation for winning, and the variable display result is "hit". In some cases, a variation pattern is determined as a usage pattern at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of winning.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (C), in the determination example 095 AKE03 in the case of the time saving final variation in which the remaining number of times of variation display in the time saving state is 0, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", Only the variation pattern PC1-3 becomes a determinable pattern, and only the variation pattern PC3-3 becomes a determinable pattern if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit". As shown in FIG. 18-4, the variation pattern PC1-3 and the variation pattern PC3-3 are both variation patterns with a special figure variation time of 140000 ms (milliseconds). Therefore, the time-saving final variation, which is the final variable display in the time-saving state, has the same special-figure variation time when the variable display result is "loss" and "hit". The variation patterns PC1-3 are included in reach variation patterns. The variation pattern PC3-3 is included in the hit variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (D), in the determination example 095 AKE04 in the case of the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "losing", Only the variation pattern PD1-1 becomes a determinable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "win", the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the determinable pattern. As shown in FIG. 18-4, the variation pattern PD1-1 is a variation pattern with an extremely short variation display time, such as a special figure variation time of 500 ms. Therefore, the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory portion at the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "loss", by repeating the start and end within a short period of time, the second pending memory is digested. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory portion at the end of the time saving state has a shorter special symbol variable time than the variable display in other game states. Since it is likely to become, the fixed performance pattern of the winning combination is likely to be derived within a short period of time. The variation pattern PD1-1 is included in the non-reach variation pattern. Variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the winning variation pattern.

In the characteristic part 095AK, when the time saving final variation (predetermined variable display) is being executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, a small win game state, etc. It is configured to be able to execute the final variation production. In this embodiment, as the time-saving final variable effect, a super reach effect (specific effect) and a relief effect (special effect) are configured to be executable.

The super ready-to-win effect displays either a success result (specific effect result) informing that control is in an advantageous state or a failure result (predetermined effect result) informing that control is not in an advantageous state. It is a possible performance. In the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is configured to be controllable in any of the production modes of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode, and is controlled to the pattern fanning mode (second 1 production state), while it is possible to execute the super reach production in the pattern fanning mode (first production mode), it is controlled in the battle mode (controlled in the second production state ), the super ready-to-win effect can be executed in a battle mode (second effect mode) different from the pattern fanning mode. The design fanning mode is a performance mode in which the performance symbols of the winning combination or the performance symbols of the reach-losing combination are temporarily stopped after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode. The battle mode is a presentation mode in which, on the screen of the presentation display device 9, after the friendly character and the enemy character have battled, a moving image showing how the friendly character wins or loses to the enemy character is reproduced and displayed. .

Hereinafter, the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the success result of the pattern fanning mode is referred to as "successful pattern effect", and the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the failure result of the pattern fanning mode is referred to as "failure pattern effect". In the present embodiment, as the successful symbol effect, the effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbols of the winning combination after the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state is configured to be executable. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the failure symbol effect, the effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbols of the reach-losing combination after the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode is configured to be executable. Also, hereinafter, the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the success result of the battle mode is referred to as "successful battle effect", and the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the unsuccessful result of the battle mode is referred to as "failed battle effect". In the present embodiment, as a successful battle effect, after the friendly character and the enemy character have battled on the screen of the effect display device 9, a moving image showing how the friendly character wins over the enemy character is reproduced and displayed. It is configured to be able to execute the performance to be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, as a failed battle effect, a moving image is reproduced on the screen of the effect display device 9, showing how the ally character is defeated by the enemy character after the ally character and the enemy character have battled. It is configured to be able to execute the effect of displaying.

The relief effect is a different effect from the super ready-to-win effect, and is an effect suggesting that the game is controlled in an advantageous state. In the present embodiment, as a relief effect, a friendly character and an enemy character battle on the screen of the effect display device 9. It is configured to be able to execute an effect of reproducing and displaying a moving image showing how a different rescue character appears and the teammate character wins over the enemy character.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled to the pattern fanning mode (first production state), the current variation display (variable display during execution), which is the time saving final variation, When the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory currently stored by the second reserved memory buffer (reserved memory means) is controlled to an advantageous state in at least one variation display, the time-saving final variable presentation succeeds. It is configured to be able to execute the design production. The variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory stored when the current variable display, which is the time saving final change, is executed is the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled to the pattern fanning mode, the current variation display, the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second pending memory, In any of the above, when the control is not made to be in an advantageous state, the failure symbol performance can be executed as the time saving final variation performance.

With such a configuration, when a successful pattern production, which is a super reach production for displaying a success result, is executed while being controlled in the pattern fanning mode, the current variable display and the currently stored second hold A variable display corresponding to the memory is notified that the control is performed at least once in an advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode (second effect state), the current variation display and the variation corresponding to the second pending storage currently stored When the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state in at least two variable displays, a successful battle effect can be executed as the time-saving final variable effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is being executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation storage, In at least one variation display, when controlled to the big win game state of the second special big win Y or the small win game state in which the hit type at the time of V winning is the big win B via the small win, the time-saving final fluctuation performance. As such, it is configured to be able to execute a successful battle production. That is, when the time-saving final variation is being executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, at least one variation of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation storage When it is controlled to an advantageous state in the display, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit via big hit B as the second state, as a time-saving final variation effect It is configured to be able to execute a successful battle production. As described above, when controlled to the second special figure jackpot Y or jackpot via jackpot B jackpot game state, in the time-saving state as the post-hit control state after the end of the jackpot game state, to the V prize during the jackpot By being controlled to the big win game state based on the above, it is substantially determined that the big win game state is controlled twice. That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state controlled to the battle mode, the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second pending storage currently stored, , when it is controlled to an advantageous state at least twice or when it is substantially confirmed that it is controlled to an advantageous state at least twice, a successful battle performance can be executed as the time-saving final variation performance. .

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, one of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory currently stored When the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and the variable display of this time and the variable display for the currently stored second reserved memory is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in a different variation display from the one time variable display , It is configured to be able to execute a relief performance as a time-saving final variation performance. Specifically, when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second pending memory, one of the In the variable display, it is controlled to the big win game state of the second special figure big win X or the small win game state in which the win type at the time of occurrence of the V winning is the big win A via the small win, and the variable display of this time and the currently stored When the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled to an advantageous state, the relief performance can be executed as the time-saving final variable performance. That is, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode, one variation display out of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation memory is controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit X or the small hit via big hit A as the first state, and the current fluctuation display and the current storage When the variable display corresponding to the stored second holding memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled to an advantageous state, the relief performance can be executed as the time-saving final variable performance.

In addition, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode, the variable display of this time and the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory currently stored are displayed once. , the second special figure jackpot Y is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the hit type at the time of V winning is controlled to the small hit game state in which the hit type is the jackpot B via the small hit, and the current fluctuation display and the second currently stored second prize are controlled. When the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled to be in an advantageous state, a successful battle performance is executed as the time-saving final variable performance. That is, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode, one variation display out of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation memory is controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the small jackpot as the second state, and the current fluctuation display and the current memory When the variable display corresponding to the stored second reserved memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled to an advantageous state, a successful battle performance is executed as the time-saving final variable performance.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state controlled to the battle mode, in any of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second pending storage currently stored When it is not controlled in an advantageous state, it is configured to be able to execute a failure battle production as a time saving final variation production.

With such a configuration, when a successful battle effect, which is a super ready-to-win effect for displaying a success result, is executed while being controlled in the battle mode, the current variable display and the currently stored second reservation memory are executed. , and , it is informed that it will be controlled to an advantageous state at least twice, or that it will be substantially determined to be controlled to an advantageous state at least twice.

Thus, in the characteristic part 095AK, when the super reach effect (successful battle effect) for displaying the success result is executed while being controlled to the battle mode, the success result is displayed while being controlled to the pattern fanning mode. It is constructed such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the displayed super ready-to-win effect (success pattern effect) is executed. Therefore, the super ready-to-win effect executed during control in the battle mode is more important for the player than the super ready-to-win effect executed during control in the pattern fanning mode. In the present embodiment, due to such a configuration, the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode are different from each other in terms of game characteristics (game characteristics), such as the degree of importance of the super ready-to-win effect for the player. is configured to be

As described above, in the characterizing portion 095AK, when it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode, it is possible to execute the super ready-to-win effect in the pattern fanning mode, while when it is controlled to the battle mode, it is possible to execute the symbol fanning mode and the It is configured to be able to execute a super ready-to-win effect in different battle modes. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize, based on the effect mode of the super ready-to-win effect, which one of the effect modes with different game characteristics is being controlled, and the player can recognize the super reach effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance, and to execute the super ready-to-win performance in a performance mode suitable for the state (performance mode) to improve the game interest.

Hereinafter, when the display result of the special symbol in the variable display is a "win" that is a big win symbol or a small winning symbol (controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display), the variable display is referred to as "hit variation". There is Further, hereinafter, when the display result of the special symbol in the variation display is a "loss" that is a losing symbol (not controlled to an advantageous state based on the variation display), the variation display may be referred to as "loss variation". Further, hereinafter, variable display corresponding to reserved storage (variable display executed based on reserved storage) may be referred to as "reserved fluctuation". Further, hereinafter, when the variation display corresponding to the pending memory is hit variation, the pending memory may be referred to as "hit pending". Further, hereinafter, when the change display corresponding to the reserved memory is a lost change, the reserved memory may be referred to as "losing reservation".

In the characteristic part 095AK, when the time saving final variation is being executed, in addition to the above-described time saving final variation presentation (super reach presentation, relief presentation), super reach suggestion presentation (suggestion presentation) can be executed. .

The super reach suggesting effect is a effect suggesting that the super reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, after the super reach suggesting effect is executed, the super reach effect is executed, and after the super reach suggesting effect is executed, the time saving final variation ends without the super reach effect being executed. It is configured to be and be. After the super reach suggestion production is executed, if the time saving final variation ends without the super reach production being executed, after the super reach suggestion production is executed, the super reach production is not executed and the relief production is executed and the time saving final variation ends, and after the super reach suggestion production is executed, the time saving final variation ends without executing either the super reach production or the relief production. ing.

Hereinafter, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is executed, the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is referred to as a "genuine super ready-to-win suggesting effect". Further, hereinafter, when the time-saving final variation ends without the super ready-to-win effect being executed after the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is executed, the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is referred to as a “gase super ready-to-win suggesting effect”. Incidentally, hereinafter, when the genuine super ready-to-win suggestive effect and the fake super ready-to-win suggestive effect are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the super ready-to-win suggestive effect.

In this embodiment, when the variable display during the time saving state including the time saving final variation is being executed, after the variable display of the production pattern is started, the variable display of the production pattern is temporarily stopped by a losing combination and then changed. The pseudo variable display (special variable display) that performs (resumes) the display again is configured to be executable once or multiple times, and when the pseudo variable display is performed multiple times in the time-saving final variation, the plurality of It is configured to be able to execute a super ready-to-win suggestive effect during a period in which any one of the pseudo variable displays is executed out of the pseudo variable displays. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game. In the present embodiment, when temporarily stopping the variable display of the performance symbols in the pseudo variable display, the variable display of the small symbols is not temporarily stopped. It should be noted that this is only an example, and the variable display of the small symbols may also be temporarily stopped when the variable display of the effect symbols is temporarily stopped in the pseudo variable display.

It should be noted that the pseudo variable display is similar to the pseudo continuous presentation in that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the degree of expectation for winning generally increases as the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation increases. It is a production to make it look like multiple variable displays.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as a post-hit control state, the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the time saving state may be a relatively small number of times such as one ( (see Figure 18-2). Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the variation pattern of the time saving final variation, variation pattern PC1-3, such as PC3-3, is configured to determine a variation pattern with a long special figure variation time (See FIG. 18-5(C)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the pseudo variable display multiple times in a short span in the time saving final fluctuation, the player feels that the time saving state has ended with a small number of fluctuation display times and is suppressed. It is configured so as to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the time saving final fluctuation, by executing the pseudo variable display multiple times in a short span, the number of variable display times in the time saving state is shown to be large, the period controlled to the time saving state is shown to be long, and the game It is configured so that interest can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, when it is controlled in the pattern fanning mode, it is possible to execute a tenpai fanning production as a super reach suggesting production, while when it is controlled in the battle mode, an allied character appearance production is performed as a super reach suggesting production. configured to run. In the tenpai-flavoring effect, after the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the "left" effect pattern display area 9L, the same effect pattern as the relevant effect pattern moves toward or away from the "right" effect pattern display area 9R. is repeated, the same effect pattern is temporarily stopped in each of the "left" and "right" effect pattern display areas 9L, 9R, and the effect suggests that the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode. . In the ally character appearance effect, a moving image showing the appearance of the ally character is played back on the screen of the effect display device 9, so that the enemy character appears and a battle with the ally character is started. It is a production that suggests that.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state of being controlled in the pattern fanning mode, in addition to the time saving final variation production and super reach suggestion production described above, the countdown production is configured to be executable. ing. On the other hand, when the time-saving final variation is being executed in the state of being controlled to the battle mode, the countdown effect is not executed. The countdown effect is an effect that displays a countdown on the screen of the effect display device 9 to indicate the remaining time until the time saving final variation is completed.

In the present embodiment, when the successful pattern production is executed as the time saving final variation production, the countdown production is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation, and the successful design production is started. It is configured so that the countdown effect ends. On the other hand, when the failure pattern performance is executed as the time saving final variation performance, the countdown performance is started corresponding to the start of the time saving final variation, and the time saving final variation is completed after the failure pattern performance is completed. It is configured so that the countdown effect ends in response to . When the countdown performance ends corresponding to the end of the time saving final variation, time-out display indicating that the remaining time until the time saving final variation ends is 0 seconds is performed in the countdown performance. In addition, when the successful design effect is executed as the time saving final variation effect, in response to the start of the successful design effect, the countdown effect ends before the time saving final change ends, so the time out display in the countdown effect is not performed. In this embodiment, the countdown effect is not executed when the time-saving final variation effect (successful symbol effect, failure symbol effect) is not executed. In addition, this is only an example, and the countdown effect may be configured to be executable when the time saving final variation effect is not executed.

In the characteristic part 095AK, when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is controlled to one of the production mode of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode, and the time saving final variation ends and the control to the time saving state ends. Corresponding to, it is configured to end the control to the effect mode. In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state that is controlled in the pattern fanning mode, the time saving final variation ends and the control to the time saving state ends, and the control to the pattern fanning mode ends In response to this, for example, an effect such as a time-out display in a countdown effect is performed. On the other hand, when the time saving final change is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode, the time saving final change ends, the control to the time saving state ends, and the control to the battle mode ends Then, for example, a failure battle production or the like is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the control to the pattern fanning mode is finished, a different effect from when the control to the battle mode is finished is configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game performance by executing the different performances when the control to the performance modes having different game characteristics ends.

FIG. 18-6 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects in the case where the time saving final variation is executed in the state of being controlled in the pattern fanning mode, regarding the characteristic part 095AK.

Specifically, in FIG. 18-6 (A), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state that is controlled in the pattern fanning mode, and the first and second out of the second reservation storage at the end of the time saving state The second reserved memory (holding information corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers 1 and 2) is a lost reservation, and the third second reserved memory (holding information corresponding to the second reserved memory number 3) is a hit. Execution periods and execution timings of various effects are shown in relation to the pending state. More specifically, FIG. 18-6(A) shows the case where the ten-pie fan effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is performed among the pseudo-variable displays performed a plurality of times in the time-saving final variation. In relation to , the execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(A), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation, and the first pseudo variable display is started. After the first and second pseudo-variable displays are executed, a ten-pie-flavoring effect (super-reach suggesting effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the tenpai fanning production ends in response to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the successful pattern production (super reach production) as the time-saving final variable production is started, corresponding to the start of the successful pattern production. to end the countdown effect. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the super ready-to-win effect suggesting effect (genuine super ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, the super ready-to-win effect is produced in response to the end of the super ready-to-win effect suggesting effect. is configured to start. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(A), the successful symbol effect ends in response to the end of the time saving final variable effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the success results such as the successful pattern effect and the successful battle effect is configured to end when the time saving final variation effect ends.

In the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), the time saving final variation is a loss variation, and if the second suspension storage at the end of the time saving state includes hit suspension, FIG. As shown in -6 (A), a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, 1 second) before the display result of the production pattern is stopped after the final variation of the time saving is completed, the hit holding standby production starts In addition, it is configured to be controlled to a performance symbol non-display state in which the performance symbols are not displayed. It should be noted that the small symbols are displayed when the performance symbol non-display state is controlled. In the hit hold standby performance, by displaying a performance image showing the hit hold standby character on the screen of the performance display device 9, the start of the hit variation corresponding to the second hold memory at the end of the time saving state is awaited. That is reported to the player. In addition, in the hit holding standby performance, a message is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 9 to notify that the control to the performance mode controlled during the time saving state is completed. When the winning pending standby performance is executed during the period in which the time-shortening final variable performance such as the successful pattern performance, the successful battle performance, and the relief performance is executed, the display control of the winning pending standby performance should be preferentially executed. In addition, it may be configured so that the time saving final variation effect is terminated in response to the start of the hit holding standby effect. Hit hold standby effect, as shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), continues to be executed even after the end of the time saving final variation, hit variation corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state (Figure 18-6 ( In the example shown in A), it ends in response to the start of the variable display corresponding to the third second reserved storage). Corresponding to the end of the hit holding standby performance, the control to the performance symbol non-display state is terminated and the display of the performance symbols is resumed.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving final fluctuation is a losing fluctuation and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes the hit holding, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the hitting holding. When a super ready-to-win effect or a relief effect is executed to display a successful result suggesting that the game is performed, the determined effect pattern of the losing combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect pattern, which confuses the player and makes the game interesting. To improve amusement in a game by preventing a decline in the value of a game, and maintaining a player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state until a winning variation based on the winning suspension is started after finishing the time saving final variation. can be done.

In FIG. 18-6 (B), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state of being controlled in the pattern fanning mode, and all the second suspension memories at the end of the time saving state (1st to 4th second suspension memory) is suspended, and the execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown in relation to the case where the ten-pai-flavoring effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display in the time-saving final fluctuation is being executed. .

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(B), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation, and the first pseudo variable display is started. After the first and second pseudo-variable displays are executed, the ten-pie fan effect is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the tenpai-flavoring performance ends corresponding to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the failure symbol performance as the time-saving final variable performance is started. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(B), the failed symbol effect ends when a predetermined effect period has elapsed after starting. Thus, in the present embodiment, the super ready-to-win effect for displaying failure results such as the failed pattern effect and the failed battle effect is configured to be able to end when a predetermined effect period has elapsed after starting. there is In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(B), the fourth pseudo-variable display is started corresponding to the end of the failed symbol effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo variable display can be executed after the super ready-to-win effect for displaying the failure results such as the failed symbol effect and the failed battle effect is finished. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(B), the 1st to 3rd pseudo-variable displays are executed before the failed symbol effect is started, and the 4th to 35th pseudo-variable displays are performed after the failed symbol effect is completed. By being executed, 35 pseudo-variable displays are executed in the time-saving final variation.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6(B), in response to the end of the time saving final variation, time-out display is performed in the countdown effect, and the countdown effect ends. In the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the time saving final variation is a loss variation, and if the second suspension storage at the end of the time saving state does not contain a hit suspension, FIG. As shown in -6 (B), in response to the end of the time saving final variation, the result effect at the time of losing is started, and it is configured to be controlled to the effect symbol non-display state. In the result performance at the time of loss, a display is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9 to notify the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the big win game state or the small win game state until the time saving state ends. Concretely, the production control command designating the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is configured to be able to be transmitted from the main board 31 to the production control board 80, and the number of game balls specified by the production control command is lost. It should be notified by time result production. In addition, in the result performance at the time of failure, a message is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 9 to inform that the control to the performance mode controlled during the time saving state is completed. As shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the result production at the time of loss is continuously executed even after the final fluctuation of the time saving is finished, and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the time of the end of the time saving state is completed. End accordingly. Corresponding to the end of the result performance at the time of losing, the control to the performance symbol non-display state is terminated and the display of the performance symbols is resumed.

According to such a configuration, the final fluctuation of the time saving and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state give the player the impression that they are a series of consistent fluctuation displays, and the game interest is enhanced. can be improved.

FIG. 18-7 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects in the case where the time saving final variation is executed in the state of being controlled in the battle mode, regarding the characteristic part 095AK.

Specifically, in FIG. 18-7 (A), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state of being controlled in the battle mode, and the first and second second holding memories at the end of the time saving state When the second reserved memory is a losing reservation, the third second reserved memory is a hit reservation, and the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display in the time-saving final variation is being executed. In relation to this, execution periods and execution timings of various effects are shown. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7(A), the first pseudo-variable display is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation. After the first and second pseudo-variable displays are executed, a friend character appearance effect (super-reach suggestive effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the third pseudo-variable display ends, the ally character appearance performance ends, and when the ally character appearance performance ends, the success battle performance is started as the time-saving final variation performance. Successful battle production ends in response to the end of the time saving final variation.

In FIG. 18-7 (B), in the state where the battle mode is controlled, the hit variation in which the hit type is the second special figure jackpot X is executed as the time-saving final variation, and all the second pending memories at the end of the time-saving state is a failure reservation, and execution periods and execution timings of various performances are shown in relation to the case where a friend character appearance performance is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is executed in the time-saving final variation. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7(B), the first pseudo-variable display is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation. After the first and second pseudo-variable displays are executed, the ally character appearance effect (super ready-to-win suggestive effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the third pseudo-variable display ends, the ally character appearance performance ends, and when the ally character appearance performance ends, the rescue performance as the time-saving final variable performance is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, after the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is executed, when the relief effect is executed as the time-saving final variable effect without executing the super ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is terminated. It is configured such that a relief effect is started in response to . In the example shown in FIG. 18-7(B), the relief effect ends in response to the end of the time saving final variation. Thus, in the present embodiment, the relief effect is configured to end in response to the end of the time saving final variation.

In FIG. 18-7 (C), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state controlled by the battle mode, and all the second retention memories at the end of the time saving state are the loss retention, 3 in the time saving final variation The execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown in relation to the case where the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the first time. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (C), the first pseudo variable display is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation. After the first and second pseudo-variable displays are executed, the friendly character appearance effect is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. In response to the termination of the third pseudo-variable display, the ally character appearance presentation is completed, and in response to the termination of the ally character appearance presentation, the failure battle presentation is started as the time-saving final variation presentation. The failure battle presentation ends when a predetermined presentation period elapses after being started, and the fourth pseudo variable display is started in response to the termination of the failure battle presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7(C), the 1st to 3rd pseudo variable displays are executed before the failed battle effect is started, and the 4th to 35th pseudo variable displays are performed after the failed battle effect is completed. By being executed, 35 pseudo-variable displays are executed in the time-saving final variation. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (C), in response to the end of the time saving final variation, the result effect at the time of losing is started, and the effect symbol non-display state is controlled. The result production at the time of failure is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving final fluctuation, and ends in response to the end of the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state, and the result production at the time of failure ends. In response to this, the control to the effect symbol non-display state is terminated and the display of the effect symbol is resumed.

FIG. 18-8 shows an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final time-saving variation in relation to the characteristic portion 095AK. Specifically, in FIG. 18-8 (A), the final variation of the time saving is lost, and the second reserved memory of the first and second of the second reserved memories at the end of the time saving state is a lost reservation, and three An example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the time saving final variation is shown in relation to the case where the second pending memory of the eye is hit pending. In FIG. 18-8 (B), the final variation of the time saving is lost, and all the second reserved memories (1st to 4th second reserved memories) out of the second reserved memories at the end of the time saving state are lost. In relation to a certain case, an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final variation of the time saving is shown.

In the present embodiment, the time saving final variation is a losing variation, and if the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes the hit hold, the time saving final change and the variation display corresponding to the hit hold are started. In the variable display of small patterns, fixed small patterns resulting in special display results including special patterns showing the letter V as medium patterns are stopped and displayed. is configured as Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 18-8 (A), in the time-saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the first and second second holding memories, the display results of the special symbols are both lost symbols Corresponding to the "losing", the fixed small pattern, which is a special display result, is stopped and displayed by variable display of the small pattern. Then, in the variable display corresponding to the third second reserved memory, the winning combination is determined by the variable display of the small patterns corresponding to the "win" in which the display result of the special pattern is the big winning pattern or the small winning pattern. A small pattern is stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, when the hit hold standby effect is being executed and the effect pattern non-display state is controlled, by stopping and displaying the fixed small pattern as a special display result, control is performed in an advantageous state. By notifying the player of the fact that the game will be played, the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the time saving final variation is a losing variation and the hit suspension is not included in the second suspension memory at the end of the time saving state, in the time saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second suspension storage , in the variable display of the small symbols, the fixed small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 18-8 (B), in the time-saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the first to fourth second holding memories, the display results of the special symbols are both lost symbols Corresponding to the "losing", the fixed small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed by variable display of the small symbols.

The characteristic part 095AK is configured to be controllable to any one of the design fanning mode and the battle mode according to the player's selection when the time saving state is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to select which one of the different performance modes with different game characteristics is to be controlled, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, in response to the end of the control to the big win game state, a big win end effect (big win) to inform the player that the control to the big win game state ends in a predetermined big win end effect period. During the jackpot end performance period, the player can select which performance mode, the pattern fanning mode or the battle mode, is to be controlled in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. are configured to be selectable. Specifically, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot end production period, a mode selection production prompting the player to select one of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode can be executed. When the mode selection effect is being executed, a predetermined mode selection operation (pressing operation on the push button 120 in this embodiment) is detected by the push button 120 as an operation means capable of detecting the operation by the player. Based on what has been done, it is configured to be able to select the production mode.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the mode selection effect is started, it is configured to be controlled to the state in which the pattern fanning mode is selected (controlled to the pattern fanning mode as a default). When the mode selection effect is being executed, the selected effect mode is switched every time the mode selection operation is detected by the push button 120.例文帳に追加When the big win end performance period ends, the big win end performance ends, the mode selection performance ends, the selection of the performance mode selected at that time is fixed, and the performance mode is shortened after the big win game state ends. It is determined as the production mode controlled in the state. In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state, on the screen of the effect display device 9, the player is asked whether it is controlled to any effect mode of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode. It is configured such that a mode for notification is performed.

FIG. 18-9 shows a display example when the mode selection effect is executed for the characterizing portion 095AK. FIG. 18-9(A) shows a display example of the state in which the design fanning mode is selected. FIG. 18-9(B) shows a display example in which the battle mode is selected.

In the mode selection effect, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), by performing a mode selection operation on the screen of the effect display device 9, one of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode is selected. A mode selection promotion image 095AK01 prompting the player to make a selection is displayed. Mode selection promotion image 095AK01 includes an image showing the shape of push button 120 and an image showing the message "Press button to select mode!" there is Also, the mode selection prompting image 095AK01 includes an image indicating which effect mode is currently selected, the pattern fanning mode or the battle mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-9(A), the design promotion mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the design promotion mode is selected.

In the state shown in FIG. 18-9(A), when a mode selection operation is detected by push button 120, the state is switched to the battle mode selected state shown in FIG. 18-9(B). In the state shown in FIG. 18-9(B), the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display manner indicating that the battle mode is selected. In the state shown in FIG. 18-9(B), when a mode selection operation is detected by push button 120, the state is switched to the state in which the design fanning mode is selected as shown in FIG. 18-9(A). When a mode selection operation is performed on the push button 120 while the mode selection effect is being executed, the mode selection operation is detected by the push sensor 124 . The push sensor 124 transmits (sends) a detection signal indicating the detection result of the mode selection operation to the effect control CPU 101 . The effect control CPU 101 switches the selected effect mode based on the detection signal received from the push sensor 124 .

In the state shown in FIGS. 18-9(A) and 18-9(B), the jackpot end effect is executed. In the jackpot end effect, as shown in FIG. 18-9(A), by displaying a message "jackpot end" on the screen of the effect display device 9, it is notified that the control to the jackpot game state is finished. be done. In addition, in the state shown in FIGS. 18-9 (A) and 18-9 (B), in each of the "left", "middle", "right" production design display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, as a confirmed production design A big hit symbol ("666") is derived, and a confirmed small symbol identical to the confirmed effect symbol is derived in the small symbol display area 9K. Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 18-9(A) and 18-9(B), the right-handed promotion notification is performed in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the image showing the message "right-handed" and the right-handed An image showing an arrow pointing in a direction is displayed.

FIG. 18-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S807 of the effect control process process as the jackpot end effect process with respect to the characteristic portion 095AK.

When the big hit end effect processing is started, the effect control CPU 101 first, for example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103, etc., is the big win end effect period in which the big win end effect is executed. (Step 095AKS101).

When it is determined that it is the jackpot end effect period (step 095AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the jackpot end effect (step 095AKS102), and after performing control to execute the mode selection effect (step 095AKS103), end the jackpot end effect processing.

In step 095AKS101, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot end production period (step 095AKS101; No), the production control CPU 101 changes the currently selected production mode out of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode to the jackpot game state. It is determined as the production mode to be controlled in the time saving state after the end (step 095AKS104).

After executing the processing of step 095AKS104, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the battle mode is determined as the effect mode controlled in the time saving state in step 095AKS104 (step 095AKS105). When it is determined that the battle mode has been determined as the production mode controlled in the time saving state (step 095AKS105; Yes), the production control CPU 101 sets the battle mode flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103 to the ON state (step 095AKS 106). The battle mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the battle mode is being controlled, and is set to the ON state when the battle mode is being controlled, and is set to the OFF state when the battle mode is not being controlled. be.

After executing the process of step 095AKS106 and in step 095AKS105, it is determined that the battle mode was not determined as the production mode controlled in the time saving state (the pattern fanning mode was decided as the production mode controlled in the time saving state). When it does (step 095AKS105; No), production control CPU101 sets the sub side time saving flag which is provided in the specified territory of RAM103 to ON state (step 095AKS107). The sub-side time-saving flag is a flag that indicates whether or not it is controlled in a time-saving state, and is set to an on-state when it is controlled to a time-saving state, while it is set to an off-state when it is not controlled to a time-saving state. be done.

After executing the process of step 095 AKS107, the effect control CPU 101 sets the sub-side time-saving number count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time-saving number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103, to the initial value according to the type of hit. (step 095AKS108). The sub-side time saving number counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of fluctuation display in the time saving state. In step 095AKS108, the sub-side time saving number count value is set to the initial value according to the control state after the hit for each hit type shown in FIG. 18-2. Specifically, the hit type is the post-hit control state, and the time-saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. If it is one of the big hits A, in step 095AKS108, the sub-side time saving frequency count value is set to "1". In addition, the hit type is the post-hit control state, and the time-saving state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. If any, in step 095AKS108, the sub-side time saving frequency count value is set to "99".

After executing the process of step 095AKS108, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step 095AKS109), and ends the jackpot end effect process.

FIG. 18-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S801 of the effect control process process as the effect symbol variation start process with respect to the characterizing part 095AK.

When the effect symbol variation start process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the sub side time saving flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the time saving state is controlled ( step 095 AKS 201). If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (it is controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS201; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the sub-side time saving number count value By updating (step 095AKS202) and determining whether or not the sub-side time saving number count value after updating is "0", it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the time saving final variation (step 095AKS203 ).

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (the current variation display is the time saving final variation) (step 095AKS203; Yes), the production control CPU 101 executes the time saving final variation production determination process. (Step 095AKS204). In the time-saving final variation performance determination process, performance contents such as whether or not the time-saving final variation performance is to be executed, the type, the execution mode, and the execution timing are determined. In addition, in the time saving final fluctuation effect determination processing, the effect contents such as whether or not the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the type, the execution mode, and the execution timing are determined. Furthermore, in the time saving final fluctuation effect determination process, the effect contents such as execution presence or absence and execution timing of the countdown effect, the number of times of execution of the pseudo variable display and execution timing are determined.

After executing the process of step 095AKS204, the effect control CPU 101 is based on the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specifying command transmitted from the main board 31, for example, and the current variation display which is the time saving final variation. It is determined whether or not the result of the variable display is "loss" (step 095AKS205). If it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display is not "lost" (step 095AKS205; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS205, when it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display, which is the time saving final variation, is "losing" (step 095AKS205; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the pending related data, so that the current It is determined whether or not the stored second reserve memory includes a win reserve (step 095AKS206). Suspension related data is storage data that can specify the contents specified by the pattern designation command and the variation type command transmitted from the main board 31, and is stored in the storage area of the suspension related data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103 ( memory).

The hold-related data storage section includes a first hold-related data storage section 095AKM01 shown in FIG. 18-12(A) and a second hold-related data storage section 095AKM02 shown in FIG. 18-12(B). In the first suspension related data storage unit 095AKM01 and the second suspension related data storage unit 095AKM02, for example, a storage area for storing data indicating that the design specification and the variation type specification can be specified in association with the suspension number is secured. It is The design designation that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content of notification by the design designation command. The change type specification that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content specified by the change type command. In the first pending related data storage unit 095AKM01 and the second pending related data storage unit 095AKM02, in the command analysis processing executed in step S704 of the production control main processing, the symbol designation command and the variation type transmitted from the main board 31 Hold-related data corresponding to the notification content of the command is stored in association with the hold number. Specifically, the first suspension related data storage unit 095AKM01 stores the suspension related data corresponding to the first suspension storage related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second suspension related data storage unit 095AKM02 stores the second Suspension-related data corresponding to the second suspension storage related to the variable display of special symbols are stored. In step 095AKS206, by confirming the hold-related data corresponding to the second hold storage stored in the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02, whether or not hit hold is included in the currently stored second hold storage. It is necessary to determine whether

Returning to FIG. 18-11, if it is determined in step 095AKS206 that the currently stored second hold storage does not include a hit hold (step 095AKS206; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit hold is included in the currently stored second hold storage (step 095AKS206; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 sets the hit hold standby flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103. By setting it to the ON state, the setting of waiting for winning is performed (step 095AKS207), and the process moves to step 095AKS218. The hit hold standby flag is a flag indicating whether or not the hit hold standby setting is performed. It is set to the off state when the medium setting is not performed. As will be described later, the time saving final variation is a losing variation, and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes the hitting hold (step 095 AKS206; Yes). When it is hit (step 095AKS207), in the time saving final variation, a hit holding standby effect is executed (step 095AKS305). On the other hand, the time saving final variation is a losing variation, and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state does not include the hitting hold (step 095AKS206: No). In this case, in the time-saving final variation, the result production at the time of failure is executed (step 095AKS326).

In step 095AKS203, if it is determined that the sub-side time saving count value is not "0" (the current variation display is a variation display during a time saving state different from the final variation in time saving) (step 095AKS203; No), for production control The CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a pseudo-variable display in this variable display (step 095AKS208). Specifically, in step 095AKS208, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the pseudo variable display determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the pseudo variable display is determined according to the obtained variation pattern.

In the pseudo variable display determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (A), the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern PB1-1 that can be determined as the variation pattern of the variation display during the time saving state different from the time saving final variation. PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3, PA3-1 to PA3-3 (see FIG. 18-5 (B)), the variation pattern PB1-1 in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the variable display of the effect pattern If PB1-3, PA2-1, PA3-1, it is determined to perform pseudo variable display (“with execution”) at a higher rate than it is determined not to perform pseudo variable display (“no execution”) configured to be On the other hand, the variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3 that can be determined as the variation patterns of the variation display during the time saving state different from the time saving final variation are the variation patterns specified by the variation pattern command. , PA3-1 to PA3-3, in the case of variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PA3-2, PA3-3 in which pseudo-continuous effects are executed in the variable display of the production pattern, at a rate of 100% It is configured such that it is determined not to perform the pseudo variable display and not determined to perform the pseudo variable display. Incidentally, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display of the effect symbols, the pseudo-variable display may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 18-11, after executing the process of step 095AKS208, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is decided in step 095AKS208 to execute the pseudo variable display (step 095AKS209). If it is determined that the pseudo variable display is not to be executed (step 095AKS209; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo variable display is to be executed (step 095AKS209; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs setting to execute the pseudo variable display, and the number of times the pseudo variable display is executed in the current variable display, The mode of execution of the pseudo variable display, such as the performance pattern to be temporarily stopped at each pseudo variable display, is determined (step 095AKS210).

Specifically, in step 095AKS210, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the pseudo-variable display count determination table shown in FIG. to determine the number of pseudo-variable display executions in the current variable display. In the pseudo variable display count determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (B), when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is either the variation pattern PB1-2 or PB1-3, the pseudo variable display execution count is determined once, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern PB1-1, the number of times the pseudo variable display is performed is determined to be 2 times, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is , or PA2-1 or PA3-1, the number of times the pseudo variable display is executed is determined to be 10 times. Also, in step 095AKS210, based on the display result of the special pattern specified by the display result specification command, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, etc., the effect pattern to be temporarily stopped in the pseudo-variable display of each time is determined. .

Returning to FIG. 18-11, after executing the process of step 095AKS210, the process moves to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS201, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (not controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS211), the effect control CPU 101 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 103. By determining whether or not the non-display flag is set to the on state, it is determined whether or not the control is in the performance symbol non-display state in which the performance symbols are not displayed (step 095AKS211). The performance symbol non-display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance symbol non-display state is controlled, and is set to the ON state when the performance symbol non-display state is controlled, while the performance symbol non-display state is set. is set to the off state when not controlled by

At step 095AKS211, when it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to ON state (not controlled to the effect symbol non-display state) (step 095AKS211; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is set to ON state (the effect symbol non-display state is controlled) (step 095AKS211; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning pending standby flag is By judging whether or not it is set to the ON state, it is judged whether or not the setting of waiting for winning is performed (step 095AKS212).

As will be described later, when the time saving final variation is a losing variation and the setting of the winning pending standby is performed (step 095AKS207), in the time saving final variation, the winning pending standby effect is executed (step 095AKS305). , is controlled to the effect pattern non-display state (step 095AKS304). On the other hand, when the time saving final variation is a losing variation and the setting of winning pending standby is not performed (step 095AKS206; No), in the time saving final variation, the result production at the time of losing is executed (step 095AKS326). , is controlled to the effect pattern non-display state (step 095AKS325). With such a configuration, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit pending standby flag is set to the ON state when the effect pattern non-display flag is set to the ON state. It is possible to determine which of the pending standby effect and the result effect at the time of failure is being executed.

In step 095AKS212, when it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is not set to the ON state (the result effect is being executed at the time of loss) (step 095AKS212; No), the effect control CPU 101 stores the The lost pending residual number count value, which is the stored value of the provided false pending residual number counter, is updated by subtracting 1 (step 095AKS213). Loss pending residual number counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining losses corresponding to the second pending storage portion at the end of the time saving state. After executing the process of step 095AKS213, the process moves to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS212, when it is determined that the hit holding standby flag is set to the ON state (the winning holding waiting production is being executed) (step 095AKS212; Yes), the production control CPU 101 is a display result designation command. Based on the display result of the designated special symbol, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the current variable display is "hit" (step 095AKS214). If it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display is not "hit" (step 095AKS214; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is "hit" (step 095AKS214; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 clears the hit pending standby flag and sets it to the OFF state. After erasing the setting of pending standby (step 095AKS215) and performing control to end the hit pending standby production (step 095AKS216), the control to the production pattern non-display state is completed, and the production of restarting the display of the production pattern. The symbol display is set to return to normal, and the performance symbol non-display flag is cleared and set to OFF (step 095AKS217). With such a configuration, the winning holding standby performance is ended and the display of the performance pattern is resumed in response to the start of the winning variation corresponding to the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state. After executing the processing of step 095AKS217, the processing moves to step 095AKS218.

At step 095AKS218, the effect control CPU 101 determines a final stop symbol of the effect symbols and the like (step 095AKS218). A final stop pattern of the performance pattern can be determined based on variable display contents such as a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern command and a display result of a special pattern specified by a display result specification command. The variable display contents corresponding to the display result of the variation pattern or the special symbol may include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", and "hit". For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the non-reach variation pattern among the loss variation patterns, the variable display content becomes "non-reach (loss)". Further, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the reach variation pattern among the loss variation patterns, the variable display content is "reach (loss)". On the other hand, when a "hit" such as a big hit or a small hit is designated as the display result of the special symbol designated by the display result designation command, the variable display content becomes "hit".

A fixed performance pattern to be a final stop pattern of the performance patterns is determined so as to be a non-matching performance pattern in which the left pattern and the right pattern are different when the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)''. A final stop pattern of the performance pattern is determined so that the left pattern and the right pattern are the same and match when the variable display content is ``reach (losing)''. The final stop pattern of the performance pattern is determined so that the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are the same and match when the variable display content is "win". In addition, when the variable display content is "win", the fixed effect pattern may be configured such that the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are matched with the effect pattern corresponding to the type of the win.

After executing the processing of step 095AKS218, the effect control CPU 101 determines the small symbol corresponding to the determined effect symbol determined in step 095AKS218 as the final stop symbol of the small symbols (step 095AKS219). For example, at step 095AKS219, the same small symbol as the confirmed effect symbol determined at step 095AKS218 may be determined as the confirmed small symbol.

After executing the processing of step 095 AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning pending standby flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether the winning pending standby setting is performed. Determine (step 095AKS220). If it is determined that the hit holding standby flag is set to the ON state (the setting of the winning holding standby is performed) (step 095AKS220; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is determined in step 095AKS219. Of the small patterns, the small patterns that are medium patterns are changed to special patterns representing the letter V (step 095AKS221). After executing the processing of step 095AKS221, the processing moves to step 095AKS219. With such a configuration, the time saving final variation is a losing variation, and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes the winning hold (step 095AKS206; Yes). If done (step 095 AKS207), in the time saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory portion at the end of the time saving state until the hit variation, the variable display of the small pattern will result in a special display result. The fixed small pattern is stopped and displayed.

In step 095AKS220, if it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is not set to ON (the winning pending standby setting is not performed) (step 095AKS220; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS222. With such a configuration, the time saving final variation is a losing variation, and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state does not include the hitting hold (step 095AKS206; No). If not performed, in the final variation of the time saving and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state, the fixed small pattern (loss small pattern) is stopped and displayed.

At step 095AKS222, the effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the effect control pattern (step 095AKS222). The performance control pattern may include control data for controlling performances by various performance devices according to the elapsed time from the start of variation of performance symbols during variable display of performance symbols.

In step 095AKS222, the production control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and uses the pattern set as In addition, in step 095AKS222, the production control CPU 101 corresponds to the execution setting of the time reduction final fluctuation production in the time reduction final fluctuation production determination process of step 095AKS204, and the determination of the time reduction final fluctuation production pattern described later. One of the performance control patterns (shortening final variable performance control pattern) is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, in step 095AKS219, the production control CPU 101 corresponds to the execution setting of the super reach suggestion production in the time saving final fluctuation production determination process, the determination of the time saving final fluctuation production pattern, etc., and a plurality of prepared production control patterns (super Reach suggestion production control pattern) is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, in step 095 AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (countdown effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the countdown effect in the time saving final fluctuation effect determination process, etc. Set as a usage pattern. In addition, in step 095AKS219, the production control CPU 101 determines the final time-saving variation production pattern in the time-saving final variation production decision process, and the execution setting of the pseudo-variable display in step 095AKS210. (Pseudo-variable display effect control pattern) is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, as a special figure fluctuation production control pattern, a time saving final fluctuation production control pattern, a super reach suggestion production control pattern, a countdown production control pattern, a pseudo variable display production control pattern, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern, One effect control pattern may be set corresponding to a combination of execution settings of each effect.

After executing the process of step 095AKS222, the effect control CPU 101 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, for example (step 095AKS223), and the screen of the effect display device 9 Above, the setting for starting the variation of the effect pattern etc. is performed (step 095AKS224). In step 095AKS224, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 095AKS222 is transmitted to the VDP 109, thereby producing the "left", "middle", and "right" effects. It suffices to make it possible to start the variation of the performance symbols in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R and the variation of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 9K. In step 095AKS224, in the hold-related data storage unit (first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01, second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02), for example, the hold-related data corresponding to the current variable display is erased, and the remaining hold-related data is erased. It suffices if a process of updating the stored contents is performed by shifting the related data. After executing the process of step 095AKS224, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation process (step 095AKS225), and ends the effect symbol change start process.

FIG. 18-14 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 095AKS204 of the performance symbol variation start processing as the time saving final variation performance determination processing regarding the characteristic portion 095AK.

When the time saving final variation effect determination process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute the time saving final change effect in the current variation display which is the time saving final change (step 095AKS301). Specifically, in step 095 AKS301, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the time saving final fluctuation effect determination table shown in FIGS. Depending on the result of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to execute the time saving final variable effect.

In the time-saving final variation performance determination table shown in FIG. 18-15, when the variable display result is "losing", the time-saving final variation performance is determined at a higher rate to execute the time-saving final variation performance ("with execution") While it is determined not to execute (“no execution”), if the variable display result is “hit”, it is decided not to execute the time saving final fluctuation production at a higher rate than it is decided to execute the time saving final fluctuation production is configured as With such a configuration, when the time-saving final variation performance is executed, the hit expectation is higher than when the time-saving final variation performance is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time saving final variation effect is executed, thereby improving the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 18-14, after executing the processing of step 095AKS301, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined in step 095AKS301 to execute the time saving final variation effect (step 095AKS302). When it is determined that it is determined not to execute the time saving final variation effect (step 095AKS302; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS314. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is determined to execute the time saving final fluctuation effect (step 095AKS302; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the battle mode flag is set to the ON state, and enters the battle mode. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step 095AKS303).

If it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to the ON state (the battle mode is controlled) (step 095AKS303; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 stores, for example, the second pending related data storage unit 095AKM02. By checking the hold-related data, etc., the current change display (relevant change) and the change display corresponding to the second hold memory as the change display corresponding to the second hold memory at the end of the time saving state (hold change) Then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit variation in which the hit type is the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit via big hit B (step 095AKS304). If it is determined that the hit variation in which the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the small hit is not included in the change display this time and the change display corresponding to the second pending memory ( Step 095AKS304; No), the effect control CPU 101, for example, by checking the suspension related data stored in the second suspension related data storage unit 095AKM02, the current variation display and the variation corresponding to the second suspension storage It is determined whether or not the display and the hit variation are included two or more times (step 095AKS305).

In step 095 AKS304, it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory include the winning variation in which the winning type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the small jackpot. If it is determined (step 095AKS304; Yes), or if it is determined in step 095AKS305 that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory include two or more winning variations. (Step 095AKS305; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs setting to execute a successful battle effect as the time saving final variable effect (step 095AKS306). After executing the process of step 095AKS306, the process moves to step 095AKS314.

In step 095AKS305, when it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reservation memory do not include two or more winning variations (step 095AKS305; No), CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not one hit variation is included in the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory (step 095AKS307). If it is determined that the hit variation is not included in the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second reservation memory (step 095AKS307; No), the effect control CPU 101 will be used as the time saving final variation effect. A setting is made to execute a failed battle effect (step 095AKS308), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS314. On the other hand, when it is determined that one hit variation is included in the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory (step 095AKS307; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 shortens the time A setting is made to execute a relief effect as the final variation effect (step 095AKS309), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS314.

In step 095AKS303, if it is determined that the battle mode flag is not set to the ON state (the pattern is controlled in the fanning mode) (step 095AKS303; No), the effect control CPU 101 will display the current fluctuation and the second It is determined whether or not one or more winning variations are included in the variation display corresponding to the reserved memory (step 095AKS310). When it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory include one or more hit variations (step 095 AKS310; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is the time saving final A setting is made to execute a successful symbol effect as a variable effect (step 095AKS311). At step 095AKS311, the effect symbol of the winning combination to be temporarily stopped in the successful symbol effect is determined. In the present embodiment, in step 095AKS311, the effect symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the effect symbol determined as the fixed effect symbol in step 095AKS218 of the effect symbol variation start process is temporarily stopped in the successful symbol effect. is determined as Specifically, when the performance symbol of the winning combination is determined as the fixed performance symbol in step 095AKS218, the performance symbol of the winning combination is determined as the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the successful symbol performance. On the other hand, in step 095AKS218, when the production pattern of the reach-losing combination is determined as the fixed production pattern, the production of the winning combination in which the middle pattern of the production pattern of the reach-losing combination is changed to the same production pattern as the left pattern and the right pattern. The symbol is determined as a performance symbol to be temporarily stopped in the successful symbol performance.

In step 095AKS310, when it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reservation memory do not include the hit variation (step 095AKS310; No), the effect control CPU 101 is reduced in time A setting is made to execute a failure symbol effect as the final variation effect (step 095AKS312). At step 095 AKS312, the effect symbol of the reach-losing combination to be temporarily stopped in the failure symbol effect is determined. In the present embodiment, in step 095AKS312, the effect symbol of the reach-losing combination corresponding to the effect symbol determined as the fixed effect symbol in step 095AKS218 of the effect symbol variation start process is temporarily stopped in the failure symbol effect. is determined as Concretely, in step 095AKS218, when the performance symbol of the ready-to-win combination is determined as the fixed performance symbol, the performance symbol of the ready-to-miss combination is determined as the performance symbol to be temporarily stopped in the failure symbol performance. On the other hand, in step 095AKS218, when the production pattern of the winning combination is determined as the fixed production pattern, the production pattern of the reach-losing combination is changed by changing the middle pattern of the production pattern of the winning combination to the production pattern determined by the random number lottery. , is determined as a performance symbol to be temporarily stopped in the failure symbol performance.

After executing the processing of step 095AKS311 and step 095AKS312, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting to execute the countdown effect (step 095AKS313). When the setting to execute the success pattern production is performed in step 095AKS311, in step 095AKS313, the countdown production is started corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation display, which is the time-saving final fluctuation, and the success pattern production is started. It suffices if a setting is made to end the countdown effect in response to the event. In addition, when the setting to execute the failure symbol production is performed in step 095AKS312, in step 095AKS313, the countdown production is started in response to the start of the current fluctuation display which is the final fluctuation of time saving, and the fluctuation of this time. It suffices if a setting is made to end the countdown effect in response to the end of the display. After executing the process of step 095AKS313, the process moves to step 095AKS314.

At step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a super ready-to-win suggestive effect in the current variation display, which is the time saving final variation (step 095AKS314). Specifically, in step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the super reach suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not to execute the super reach suggesting effect depending on whether it is controlled to. Which of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode is being controlled may be specified based on whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state.

In the super reach suggesting effect determination table shown in FIGS. 18-16, when it is controlled in the battle mode, the super reach suggesting effect is executed ("executed") at a lower rate than when it is controlled in the pattern fanning mode. configured to be determined. As described above, the super ready-to-win effect executed under control in the battle mode is more important for the player than the super ready-to-win effect executed under control in the pattern fanning mode. For this reason, when it is controlled in the battle mode, after the gase super reach suggestion production is executed, if the time saving final fluctuation ends without the super reach production being executed, when it is controlled in the pattern fanning mode In addition, the player is more disappointed than when the time-saving final variation ends without executing the super ready-to-win performance after the execution of the guess super ready-to-win performance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is controlled in the battle mode, by determining to execute the super reach suggestion production at a lower rate than when it is controlled in the pattern fanning mode, when it is controlled in the battle mode , It is configured so that the ratio of execution of the guessing super reach suggesting effect is lower than when it is controlled in the pattern fanning mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 18-14, after executing the process of step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined in step 095AKS314 to execute the super ready-to-win suggestive effect (step 095AKS315). When it is determined that the super reach suggesting effect is not executed (step 095AKS315; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS319. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is determined to execute the super reach suggestion effect (step 095AKS315; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the battle mode flag is set to the ON state, thereby entering the battle mode. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step 095AKS316).

When it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to ON state (the battle mode is controlled) (step 095 AKS316; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is set to execute a friend character appearance effect as a super ready-to-win suggesting effect. (step 095AKS317), and the process moves to step 095AKS319. On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle mode flag is not set to the ON state (it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode) (step 095AKS316; No), the production control CPU 101 executes the tenpai fanning production as a super ready-to-win suggestion production. is set (step 095AKS318), and the process moves to step 095AKS319. In step 095 AKS318, the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the "left" performance symbol display area 9L in the ten-pie fanning performance (the performance symbol that repeats the action of approaching and leaving the "right" performance symbol display area 9R in the ten-pie fanning performance) ) is determined. In this embodiment, in step 095AKS318, it corresponds to the effect pattern temporarily stopped by the success symbol effect determined in step 095AKS311 and the effect pattern temporarily stopped by the failure symbol effect determined in step 095AKS312. Then, the performance symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "left" performance symbol display area 9L in the tenpai-flavoring performance is determined. Specifically, in step 095AKS318, the left design of the performance design determined in step 095AKS311 or step 095AKS312 is determined as the performance design to be temporarily stopped in the "left" performance design display area 9L in the tenpai fanning performance. .

In addition, in the state of being controlled to the pattern fanning mode (the battle mode flag is set to the off state), it is determined in step 095AKS301 that the time saving final variation effect is not executed, and step 095AKS314 suggests super reach. When it is decided to execute the effect, in step 095AKS318, the setting for executing the tenpai-inflaming effect as the gasse-super-reach suggesting effect may be performed. Specifically, in this case, in step 095AKS318, after the production pattern is temporarily stopped in the "left" production pattern display area 9L, the same production as the production pattern is performed as a tenpai inciting production that is a production that suggests gaseous super reach. After repeating the action of approaching and leaving the "right" production pattern display area 9R, the production pattern different from the relevant production pattern is temporarily stopped in the "right" production pattern display area 9R, and the production pattern is non-existent. It suffices if a setting is made to execute an effect that is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode.

In step 095AKS319, the production control CPU 101 determines the time saving final fluctuation production pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance according to the determination results of steps 095AKS301 to step 095AKS318 (step 095AKS319), and determines the time saving final fluctuation production. End decision processing. The time saving final variation performance pattern may include data designating performance contents such as execution timings and execution times of various performances during the time saving final variation. In the time-saving final variation performance determination process, the time-saving final variation performance pattern is determined in step 095AKS319, thereby determining the execution timing and the number of times of execution of various performances.

FIGS. 18-17 show a configuration example of the time-saving final variation effect pattern regarding the characteristic part 095AK. A plurality of time-saving final variation effect patterns shown in FIGS. 18-17 are different from each other in execution timings and execution times of various effects. 18 to 17 show only a part of a plurality of time saving final variation production patterns prepared in advance, and illustration of other time saving final variation production patterns is omitted.

FIG. 18-18 shows an example of determination of the time saving final variation performance pattern according to whether or not the time saving final variation performance is executed during the time saving final variation and the type of the time saving final variation performance with respect to the characteristic portion 095AK. In the characteristic part 095AK, the case where the successful pattern production or the successful battle production is executed as the time saving final variation production, the case where the failure pattern production or the failure battle production is executed as the time saving final fluctuation production, and the relief production as the time saving final fluctuation production The setting of the determinable pattern is made different between when is executed and when the time saving final variation effect is not executed during the time saving final variation.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (A), in the decision example 095AKF01 in the case where the successful pattern production or the successful battle production is executed as the time saving final variation production, when the super reach suggestion production is executed ("executed") , production patterns CAD1-1 to CAD1-3 are included in the determinable patterns. In the production pattern CAD1-1, after the pseudo variable display is executed twice in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the third time, and the true super reach suggesting effect is executed. This is a performance pattern in which the time-saving final variation performance (successful symbol performance or successful battle performance) is executed until the time-saving final variation is completed after the performance is completed. In the production pattern CAD1-2, after the pseudo variable display is executed 16 times in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the 17th time, and the true super reach suggesting effect is executed. This is a performance pattern in which the time-saving final variation performance (successful symbol performance or successful battle performance) is executed until the time-saving final variation is completed after the performance is completed. In the production pattern CAD1-3, after the pseudo variable display is executed 34 times in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the 35th time, and the true super reach suggesting effect is executed. This is a performance pattern in which the time-saving final variation performance (successful symbol performance or successful battle performance) is executed until the time-saving final variation is completed after the performance is completed. In the determination example 095AKF01, when the super ready-to-win suggestive effect is not executed (“no execution”), the effect patterns CAD1-4 are included in the determinable patterns. Production pattern CAD1-4 corresponds to the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo variable display is executed 35 times, the time saving final fluctuation production (successful pattern production or successful battle production) starts, and the time saving final fluctuation ends. It is a production pattern in which the time saving final fluctuation production ends.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (B), in the determination example 095AKF02 in the case where the failed pattern effect or the failed battle effect is executed as the time saving final variable effect, when the super reach suggesting effect is executed, the effect pattern CAD2-1 ˜CAD2-3 are included in the determinable pattern. In the production pattern CAD2-1, after the pseudo variable display is executed twice in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the third time, and the genuine super reach suggesting effect is executed. A time-saving final variation performance (failure pattern performance or failure battle performance) is executed until a predetermined performance period elapses after the performance is completed, and after the time-saving final variation performance is completed, pseudo-variable display is executed 32 times. It is a production pattern in which the time saving final variation ends. In the production pattern CAD2-2, after the pseudo variable display is executed 16 times in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the 17th time, and the true super reach suggesting effect is executed. A time-saving final variation performance (failed pattern performance or failure battle performance) is executed until a predetermined performance period elapses after the performance is completed, and after the time-saving final variation performance is completed, pseudo-variable display is executed 18 times. It is a production pattern in which the time saving final variation ends. In the production pattern CAD2-3, after the pseudo variable display is executed 34 times in the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo variable display is executed for the 35th time, and the true super reach suggesting effect is executed. This is a production pattern in which a time-saving final variable production (failure pattern production or failure battle production) is executed in response to the completion of the production. In the determination example 095AKF02, when the super ready-to-win suggestive effect is not executed, the effect patterns CAD2-4 are included in the determinable patterns. Production pattern CAD2-4 is a production pattern in which the time saving final variation production (failure pattern production or failure battle production) is executed after the pseudo variable display is executed 35 times in the time saving final fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (C), in the determination example 095AKF03 in the case where the relief effect is executed as the time saving final variable effect, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns CAD3-1 to CAD3-3 , is included in the decidable pattern. In the production pattern CAD3-1, after the pseudo variable display is executed twice in the time saving final variation, the surprise super reach suggestion production is executed during the period when the third pseudo variable display is executed, and the surprise super reach suggestion is performed. This is a performance pattern in which the time saving final variation performance (relief performance) is executed from the end of the performance until the end of the time saving final variation. In the production pattern CAD3-2, after the pseudo variable display is executed 16 times in the time saving final variation, the fake super reach suggestion production is executed during the period when the pseudo variable display is executed for the 17th time, and the fake super reach suggestion is executed. This is a performance pattern in which the time saving final variation performance (relief performance) is executed from the end of the performance until the end of the time saving final variation. In the production pattern CAD3-3, after the pseudo variable display is executed 34 times in the time saving final variation, the fake super reach suggestion production is executed during the period when the pseudo variable display is executed for the 35th time, and the fake super reach suggestion is executed. This is a performance pattern in which the time saving final variation performance (relief performance) is executed from the end of the performance until the end of the time saving final variation. In decision example 095AKF03, when the super ready-to-win suggesting effect is not executed, the effect pattern CAD3-4 is included in the determinable patterns. In the production pattern CAD3-4, after the pseudo variable display is executed 35 times in the time reduction final fluctuation, the time reduction final fluctuation production (relief production) is started, and the time reduction final fluctuation production is performed in response to the completion of the time reduction final fluctuation. is a production pattern ending with .

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (D), in the decision example 095AKF04 when the time saving final variation production is not executed, when the super reach suggestion production is executed, production patterns CAD4-1 to CAD4-3 are determinable patterns included in In the production pattern CAD4-1, after the pseudo-variable display is executed twice in the time-saving final variation, the super-reach suggestion production is executed during the period when the pseudo-variable display is executed for the third time, and the super-reach suggestion is carried out. This is an effect pattern in which the time saving final variation is completed after the pseudo variable display is executed 32 times after the effect is finished. In the production pattern CAD4-2, after the pseudo variable display is executed 16 times in the time saving final variation, the fake super reach suggesting production is executed during the period when the pseudo variable display is executed for the 17th time, and the fake super reach suggestion production is executed. This is an effect pattern in which the time saving final variation is completed after the pseudo variable display is executed 18 times after the effect is finished. In the production pattern CAD4-3, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 34 times in the time-saving final fluctuation, the time-saving final fluctuation is performed after the gaseous super-reach suggesting production is executed during the period in which the pseudo-variable display is executed for the 35th time. This is the production pattern that ends. In decision example 095AKF04, when the super ready-to-win suggestive effect is not executed, the effect pattern CAD4-4 is included in the determinable patterns. Effect pattern CAD4-4 is an effect pattern in which the time saving final variation ends after the pseudo variable display is executed 35 times in the time saving final variation.

FIG. 18-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S802 of the effect control process process as the process during effect symbol variation regarding the characterizing part 095AK.

When the production design changing process is started, the production control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the production design non-display flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the production design non-display state is controlled. is determined (step 095AKS401). When it is determined that the performance symbol non-display flag is set to ON state (the performance symbol non-display state is controlled) (step 095AKS401; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to the ON state (the effect symbol non-display state is not controlled) (step 095 AKS401; No), the effect control CPU 101 puts the winning pending standby flag in the ON state. , it is determined whether or not the winning pending standby setting is performed (step 095AKS402). If it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is not set to the ON state (the winning pending standby setting is not performed) (step 095AKS402; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

If it is determined that the hit pending standby flag is set to the ON state (the hit pending standby setting is performed) (step 095 AKS402; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is, for example, a timer of the effect control process timer Based on the value, etc., it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined start timing for starting the winning hold standby effect (step 095AKS403). In this embodiment, the timing before the predetermined period (in this embodiment, 1 second) is set in advance as the start timing of the hit holding standby effect than the time saving final variation ends. When it is determined that it is not the start timing of the hit holding standby effect (step 095AKS403; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

When it is determined that it is time to start the hit holding standby effect (step 095AKS403; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 starts control to the effect symbol non-display state and sets the effect symbol non-display flag to the ON state ( Step 095AKS404), control is performed to start the hit hold standby effect (step 095AKS405). After executing the processing of step 095AKS405, the processing moves to step 095AKS406.

At step 095AKS406, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step 095AKS406). In step 095AKS406, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer.

In step 095AKS406, when it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 095AKS406; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the pseudo variable display period during which pseudo variable display is executed (step 095AKS407). The pseudo variable display period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (pseudo variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. When it is determined that it is the pseudo variable display period (step 095AKS407; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute pseudo variable display (step 095AKS408).

After executing the process of step 095AKS408 or when it is determined that it is not the pseudo variable display period in step 095AKS407 (step 095AKS407; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed. (Step 095AKS409). The countdown effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (countdown effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222, for example. When it is determined that it is the countdown effect period (step 095AKS409; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the countdown effect (step 095AKS410).

After executing the process of step 095AKS410, or in step 095AKS409, if it is determined that it is not the countdown production period (step 095AKS409; No), the production control CPU 101 is the time reduction final fluctuation production period in which the time reduction final fluctuation production is executed. It is determined whether or not there is (step 095AKS411). Time saving final fluctuation production period, for example in production control pattern (time saving final fluctuation production control pattern) which is decided in step AKS222, it should have been decided beforehand. When it is determined that it is the time saving final fluctuation production period (step 095AKS411; Yes), the production control CPU 101 performs control to execute the time saving final fluctuation production (step 095AKS412).

After executing the process of step 095AKS412, or when it is determined that it is not the time saving final variation production period in step 095AKS411 (step 095AKS411; No), the production control CPU 101 executes the super reach suggestion production. It is determined whether or not it is the period (step 095AKS413). The super reach suggesting effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (super reach suggesting effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222, for example. When it is determined that it is the super ready-to-win suggestive effect period (step 095AKS413; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the super ready-to-win suggestive effect (step 095AKS414).

After executing the processing of step 095AKS414, or when it is determined that it is not the super reach suggesting effect period in step 095AKS413 (step 095AKS413; No), the effect control CPU 101 executes other effect control (step 095AKS415), Terminate the processing during the production design fluctuation. In step 095AKS415, according to the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 095AKS222, control to execute normal reach production, control to execute pseudo continuous production, etc. may be performed. Moreover, in step 095AKS415, the control which performs right hitting promotion information should just be performed corresponding to being controlled by the time saving state. Furthermore, in step 095AKS415, in response to being controlled in the time saving state, control to execute mode notification to notify the player which effect mode of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode is being controlled. should be performed.

In step 095AKS406, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step 095AKS406; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main substrate 31 has been received (step 095AKS416 ). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step 095AKS416; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect symbol changing process. After the variable display time has passed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation designation command, predetermined error processing is performed in response to the fact that the design confirmation designation command could not be received normally. may be executed.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step 095AKS416; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 transmits a display control command to the VDP 109, for example, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation While deriving the determined effect pattern determined in step 095AKS218 of the start process, as a display result of the variable display of the small pattern, the determined small pattern determined in step 095AKS219 of the effect symbol variation start process, and the effect symbol variation start process Display control for deriving the fixed small pattern changed in step 095AKS221 is performed (step 095AKS417). It should be noted that when the finalized performance pattern is derived when the performance pattern non-display state is controlled, although the control for deriving the finalized performance pattern is internally performed, the finalized performance pattern is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 9. Do not show.

After executing the process of step 095AKS417, the production control CPU 101 sets a predetermined fixed time as a hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 095AKS418), and changes the value of the production control process flag to the production symbol variation stop process. is updated to a value corresponding to (step 095AKS419). After executing the processing of step 095AKS419, the processing moves to step 095AKS420.

18-20, in step 095AKS420, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether the time saving state is controlled ( step 095 AKS 420). When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (the time-saving state is controlled) (step 095AKS420; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 has a sub-side time-saving count value of "0". By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the time saving final variation (step 095AKS421).

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is not "0" (the current variable display is a variable display during a time saving state different from the final time saving change) (step 095AKS421; No), the effect control CPU 101, for example Based on the display result of the special symbol designated by the display result designation command, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the current variable display is a "jackpot" (step 095AKS422). When it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display is not a "jackpot" (step 095AKS422; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during effect symbol fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display is a "jackpot" (step 095AKS422; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

In step 095AKS421, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (this time fluctuation display is the time saving final fluctuation) (step 095AKS421; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is, for example, a display result designation command It is determined whether or not the variable display result of the current variable display, which is the time-saving final variation, is "losing" (step 095AKS423). If it is determined that the variable display result of the current variable display is not "lost" (step 095AKS423; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

In step 095AKS423, when it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display of this time, which is the time saving final variation, is "losing" (step 095AKS423; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 sets the winning pending standby flag to the ON state. By judging whether or not it is set, it is judged whether or not the setting of waiting for winning is made (step 095AKS424). If it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is set to ON (the winning pending standby setting is set) (step 095AKS424; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

If it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is not set to the ON state (the setting of the winning pending standby is not performed) (step 095 AKS424; No), the effect control CPU 101 switches to the effect symbol non-display state. When control is started, the effect pattern non-display flag is set to ON state (step 095AKS425), and control is performed to start the result effect at the time of losing (step 095AKS426). After executing the process of step 095AKS426, the effect control CPU 101 sets the losing pending residual number count value to the initial value corresponding to the current second pending memory number (step 095AKS427). For example, if the current second pending storage number is "4", then in step 095AKS427, the lost pending remaining number count value is set to "4". The current second pending storage number may be identified by checking the storage contents of the second pending related data storage unit 095AKM02, for example. After executing the processing of step 095AKS427, the processing moves to step 095AKS428.

In step 095AKS428, the effect control CPU 101 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 095AKS428), clears the sub-side time saving number counter, and sets the sub-side time saving number count value to "0". (Step 095AKS429). After executing the processing of step 095AKS429, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state (step 095AKS430). When determining that the battle mode flag is not set to ON state (step 095AKS430; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during effect symbol fluctuation. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to ON state (step 095AKS430; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 clears the battle mode flag and sets it to OFF state (step 095AKS431), and effect pattern variation. Terminate intermediate processing.

In step 095AKS420, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (not controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS420; No), the effect control CPU 101 turns on the effect symbol non-display flag. By determining whether or not it is set to , it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the effect symbol non-display state (step 095AKS432). When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to ON state (the effect symbol non-display state is not controlled) (step 095AKS432; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect symbol changing process. .

When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state (the effect symbol non-display state is controlled) (step 095 AKS432; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 puts the winning pending standby flag on. , it is determined whether or not the hit holding standby effect is being executed (step 095AKS433). If it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is set to ON (the winning pending standby effect is being executed) (step 095 AKS433; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect symbol changing process.

In step 095AKS433, when it is determined that the winning pending standby flag is not set to ON state (the result effect at the time of losing is being executed) (step 095AKS433; No), the effect control CPU 101 counts the remaining number of losing pending. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" (step 095AKS434). When it is determined that the lost pending residual number count value is not "0" (step 095AKS434; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during effect symbol fluctuation.

When it is determined that the losing pending residual number count value is "0" (step 095AKS434; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to end the result effect at the time of losing (step 095AKS435), and the normal return of the effect symbol display. Along with the setting, the effect symbol non-display flag is cleared and set to OFF (step 095AKS436), and the process during effect symbol fluctuation is terminated. According to such a configuration, in response to the end of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state, the result performance at the time of failure ends and the display of the performance pattern is resumed.

18-21 to 18-27, an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 095AK will be described below.

First, with reference to FIGS. 18-21 and 18-22, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to the pattern inflection mode, and in the time-saving final variation, when the tenpai inflection production is executed as a gaseous super reach suggestion production will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the ten-pie fan effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described as an example.

FIG. 18-21(A) shows, in a normal state, a losing combination ("127") in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the production display device 9. A performance symbol is derived, and a state is shown in which the small symbols of the same losing combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K. In FIG. 18-21(B), the variable display of the performance symbols is started in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and the small symbols are displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. It shows the state where the variable display is started. In FIG. 18-21(C), the performance symbols of the winning combination (“555”) are derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and the small symbols are displayed. It shows a state in which small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the area 9K. FIG. 18-21(D) shows the state in which the control to the jackpot game state has started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (D), in response to the start of control to the jackpot game state, the right-handed promotion notification is started in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the fanfare effect is started. there is In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21(D), a big win display is performed by displaying a message "big win!"

FIG. 18-21(E) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect are started. In the jackpot end effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21(E), a message "jackpot end" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to inform that the control to the jackpot game state is finished. . In the mode selection effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21 (E), a mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and one of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode is selected. An effect is performed to urge the player to make a selection. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21(E), the design promotion mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the design promotion mode is selected. Hereinafter, the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect are ended in response to the end of the jackpot end effect period in the state where the pattern fanning mode is selected, and the effect mode controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state is the pattern. A case where the fanning mode is determined will be described as an example.

In FIG. 18-21 (F), in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the first pseudo variable display during the time saving final fluctuation is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, "left", It shows a state in which variable display of performance symbols is started in each of the "middle" and "right" performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 9K. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (F), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time saving final variation, and on the screen of the effect display device 9, the rest until the time saving final variation ends The message "140 seconds remaining" is displayed as a countdown display indicating that the time is 140 seconds. Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (F), in response to being controlled in the time saving state, right hitting promotion notification is performed in the right hitting display area 9Z, and mode notification is performed, By displaying a message ``symbol-increase mode'' on the screen of the effect display device 9, it is notified that the control is in the symbol-increase mode.

Figure 18-21 (G) shows that in the first pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" in each of the production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (" 135”) is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18-21 (H), the second pseudo-variable display during the time saving final fluctuation is started, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production design display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It shows the state where the variable display is started. Figure 18-21 (I) shows that in the second pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" in each of the production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (" 357”) is temporarily stopped.

Moving to FIG. 18-22, FIG. 18-22 (A) starts the third pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving, "left", "middle", "right" Each production pattern display area 9L, 9C and 9R show the state in which the variable display of the performance symbols is started. FIG. 18-22(B) shows a state in which the ten-pie-influence effect is being executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display during the time-saving final variation is being executed. 18-22(B), in the ten-pie fan effect shown in FIG. By repeating the action of approaching and leaving the "right" production pattern display area 9R, the production pattern indicating the number 7 is temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" production pattern display areas 9L and 9R. It is suggested that the production pattern is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(B), in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C, variable display of effect symbols is performed.

FIG. 18-22(C) is a production pattern different from the production pattern showing the number 7 temporarily stopped in the “left” production pattern display area 9L in the tenpai-flavoring production as a gaseous super reach suggesting production. It shows a state in which the performance symbol is temporarily stopped in the non-reach mode by temporarily stopping the performance symbol indicating the number of "R" in the "right" performance symbol display area 9R. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(C), in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C, the effect symbol is variably displayed. Figure 18-22 (D) is the 4th time during the final fluctuation of the time reduction after the tenpai inciting production as a gaseous super reach suggestion production is completed in response to the completion of the third pseudo-variable display during the final fluctuation of the time reduction is started, and the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R.

Next, referring to FIGS. 18-21 and 18-22, it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the variable display result is "big hit" In the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggestion A description will be given of an example of the effect operation in the case where the success symbol effect is executed after the ten-pie fan effect is executed as the effect. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the ten-pie fan effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described as an example.

In this case, after the rendering operations shown in FIGS. 18-21(A) to 18-21(I), FIGS. ) is executed. FIG. 18-22(E) shows that in the success pattern production, the action of repeatedly approaching and leaving the “right” production pattern display area 9R in the tenpai swaying production shown in FIG. 18-22(B). ' is temporarily stopped in the "right" production pattern display area 9L. is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(E), in the "middle" effect symbol display area 9C, variable display of effect symbols is performed. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(E), the countdown effect has ended in response to the start of the success symbol effect, and the countdown display has been erased.

FIG. 18-22(F) shows, in the successful design effect, the effect symbols temporarily stopped in the respective “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R in the state shown in FIG. 18-22(E). By temporarily stopping the production pattern indicating the number 7 which is the same production pattern in the "middle" production pattern display area 9C, the "left", "middle" and "right" production pattern display areas 9L are displayed. , 9C and 9R, the effect symbols of the winning combination ("777") are temporarily stopped. FIG. 18-22 (G) corresponds to the end of the time saving final variation, "left", "middle", "right" in each of the production design display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, Figure 18-22 (F) shows a state in which the performance symbols of the temporarily stopped winning combination are derived and the small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, referring to FIGS. 18-21 to 18-23, it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the variable display result is “losing”. An example of the performance operation will be explained in the case where the successful pattern performance is executed after the ten-pie-flavoring performance is executed as the performance, and the hit holding standby performance is executed after the successful pattern performance is executed. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the ten-pie fan effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described as an example. More specifically, hereinafter, the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation, the first second holding memory of the second holding memory at the end of the time saving state is a losing hold, and the second second holding memory is A case where the variable display result is "hit pending" corresponding to the variable display of "big hit" will be described as an example.

In this case, Figures 18-21 (A) ~ Figure 18-21 (I), Figure 18-22 (A), Figure 18-22 (B), Figure 18-22 (E), Figure 18-22 (F) 18-23(A) is executed after the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-23(A) is executed. In FIG. 18-23 (A), the hit holding standby effect is being executed, and in the state where the effect pattern non-display state is controlled, in response to the end of the time saving final variation, in the small symbol display area 9K , a small pattern ("7V7") resulting in a special display including a special pattern representing the letter V as a medium pattern is derived. In the hit pending standby effect shown in FIG. 18-23(A), the effect image showing the hit pending standby character is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and the message "symbol fanning mode finished" is displayed. By doing so, it is notified that the control to the pattern fanning mode has ended. In the state shown in FIG. 18-23 (A), corresponding to the end of the control to the time-saving state, right-handed promotion information and mode information have ended.

In FIG. 18-23 (B), the loss variation corresponding to the first second suspension memory at the end of the time saving state that is the loss suspension is started, and the small design variable display is performed in the small design display area 9K This indicates that the FIG. 18-23 (C) corresponds to the end of the loss variation corresponding to the first second reservation memory at the time of the end of the time saving state, a small pattern that becomes a special display result in the small pattern display area 9K (“4V6”) is derived.

FIG. 18-23 (D) shows a state in which a hit variation corresponding to the second second pending memory at the end of the time saving state, which is a hit pending, is started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-23 (D), the small design variable display is performed in the small design display area 9K, and the hit variation corresponding to the second reservation storage at the end of the time saving state is started. Correspondingly, the hit holding standby effect is completed, the control to the effect pattern non-display state is completed, and the display of the effect pattern is restarted, and each effect pattern display of "left", "middle", and "right" Effect symbols are variably displayed in areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. FIG. 18-23 (E) corresponds to the end of the hit variation corresponding to the second second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the hit hold, “left”, “middle”, “right ", the performance symbol of the winning combination ("333") is derived in each of the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the small winning display area 9K. ing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-21, 18-22, and 18-24, it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the variable display result is "losing" Time saving final fluctuation An example of the performance operation in the case where the failure pattern performance is executed after the ten-pie-flavoring performance is executed as the authentic super ready-to-win suggesting performance, and the result performance at the time of failure is executed after the failure pattern performance is executed will be explained. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the ten-pie fan effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described as an example. More specifically, hereinafter, the time saving final variation is a loss variation, all the second suspension memory (1st to 4th second suspension storage) at the end of the time saving state is a loss suspension Using an example explain.

In this case, after the rendering operations shown in FIGS. 18-21(A) to 18-21(I), FIGS. ) is executed. FIG. 18-22(H) shows that in the failure symbol production, the action of repeatedly approaching and leaving the “right” production symbol display area 9R in the tenpai swaying production shown in FIG. 18-22(B). ' is temporarily stopped in the "right" production pattern display area 9L. is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(H), in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C, variable display of effect symbols is performed. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22(H), the countdown effect continues.

FIG. 18-22(I) shows, in the failed design effect, the effect symbols temporarily stopped in the respective “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R in the state shown in FIG. 18-22(H). By temporarily stopping the production pattern indicating the number 6, which is a different production pattern, in the "middle" production pattern display area 9C, the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 9L, At 9C and 9R, the effect symbol of the reach-losing combination ("767") is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18-22 (J), after the failure pattern effect is completed in response to the elapse of the predetermined effect period, the fourth pseudo-variable display during the time saving final change is started, "left", "middle" , 9L, 9C, and 9R, respectively.

Fig. 18-22 (K) corresponds to the completion of the final variation of the time saving, "left", "middle", "right" in each production design display area 9L, 9C, 9R, Fig. 18-22 (I) shows a state in which the effect symbols of the temporarily stopped ready-to-lose combination are derived in the failure symbol effect shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (K), in response to the end of the time saving final variation, in the countdown production, as a timeout display indicating that the remaining time until the time saving final variation is 0 seconds The message "Remaining 0 seconds" is displayed.

FIG. 18-24(A) shows a state in which the result effect at the time of losing is started and the state is controlled to the effect symbol non-display state. In the result production at the time of losing shown in FIG. 18-24 (A), on the screen of the production display device 9, it is notified that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is 1334 by the end of the time saving state. Along with the message "Total 1334pt" being displayed, the message "End of pattern fanning mode" is displayed to notify that the control to the symbol fanning mode has ended. In the state shown in FIG. 18-24 (A), the countdown production ends in response to the end of the time saving final variation, the countdown display is erased, and the control to the time saving state has ended. Right-handed promotion notification and mode notification have ended.

In FIG. 18-24 (B), the loss variation corresponding to the first second suspension memory at the end of the time saving state that is the loss suspension is started, and the small design variable display is started in the small design display area 9K state. In FIG. 18-24 (C), in response to the end of the loss variation corresponding to the first second reservation storage at the end of the time saving state, the combination of loss in the small symbol display area 9K ("334") shows a state in which the small pattern of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (D), the loss variation corresponding to the second second pending memory at the end of the time saving state that is the loss pending is started, and the small design variable display is started in the small design display area 9K state. In FIG. 18-24 (E), in response to the end of the loss variation corresponding to the second second reservation storage at the end of the time saving state, the combination of loss in the small pattern display area 9K ("268") shows a state in which the small pattern of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (F), the loss variation corresponding to the third second pending memory at the end of the time saving state that is the loss pending is started, and the variable display of the small design is started in the small design display area 9K. state. In FIG. 18-24 (G), in response to the end of the loss variation corresponding to the third second reservation storage at the end of the time saving state, the combination of loss in the small pattern display area 9K ("145") shows a state in which the small pattern of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (H), the loss variation corresponding to the fourth second pending memory at the end of the time saving state that is the loss pending is started, and the small design variable display is started in the small design display area 9K. state. In FIG. 18-24 (I), in response to the end of the loss variation corresponding to the fourth second reservation memory at the end of the time saving state, the combination of loss in the small symbol display area 9K ("957") shows a state in which the small pattern of is derived.

In FIG. 18-24 (J), the result effect at the time of loss ends in response to the end of the variable display for the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state, and the control to the effect symbol non-display state ends. , "left", "middle", and "right" in each of the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In the state shown in FIG. 18-24(J), in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, the same small symbol derived from the small symbol display area 9K is displayed. The production pattern of the losing combination is derived.

Next, referring to FIGS. 18-25 and 18-26, it is controlled to the battle mode in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and in the time-saving final variation, the ally character appearance effect is executed as a gaseous super reach suggesting effect. An example of the effect operation in this case will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo variable displays executed in the time saving final variation will be described as an example. .

FIG. 18-25(A) shows, in a normal state, a losing combination ("127") in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the production display device 9. A performance symbol is derived, and a state is shown in which the small symbols of the same losing combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K. In FIG. 18-25(B), the variable display of the performance symbols is started in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and the small symbols are displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. It shows the state where the variable display is started. In FIG. 18-25(C), the performance symbols of the winning combination (“555”) are derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and the small symbols are displayed. It shows a state in which small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the area 9K. FIG. 18-25(D) shows a state in which the control to the jackpot game state is started, the right-handed promotion notification is started in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the fanfare effect is started.

FIG. 18-25(E) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect are started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25(E), the design promotion mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the design promotion mode is selected. 18-25(E), in which the mode selection operation is detected by the push button 120, the battle mode shown in FIG. 18-25(F) is activated. A case where the selected state is controlled will be described as an example. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25(F), the mode selection prompting image 095AK01 is displayed in a display manner indicating that the battle mode is selected. In the following, in the state where the battle mode is selected, the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect are ended in response to the end of the jackpot end effect period, and the effect mode controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state is the battle mode. A case where it is determined to be will be described as an example.

In FIG. 18-25 (G), in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the first pseudo variable display during the time saving final fluctuation is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, "left", It shows a state in which variable display of performance symbols is started in each of the "middle" and "right" performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, and variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 9K. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25 (G), in response to being controlled to the time saving state, the right hitting promotion notification is performed in the right hitting display area 9Z, and the mode notification is performed, and the effect display By displaying a message "battle mode" on the screen of the device 9, it is notified that the battle mode is being controlled.

Figure 18-25 (H) shows that in the first pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" in each of the production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (" 135”) is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18-25 (I), the second pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving is started, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production design display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It shows the state where the variable display is started. Figure 18-25 (J) shows that in the second pseudo-variable display during the final variation of the time saving, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" in each of the production pattern display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (" 357”) is temporarily stopped.

Moving to FIG. 18-26, FIG. 18-26 (A) starts the third pseudo-variable display during the final fluctuation of time saving, "left", "middle", "right" Each production pattern display area 9L, 9C and 9R show the state in which the variable display of the performance symbols is started. FIG. 18-26(B) shows a state in which the friendly character appearance effect is being executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display during the time saving final variation is being executed. In the friendly character appearance effect, as shown in FIG. 18-26(B), on the screen of the effect display device 9, a moving image showing the appearance of the friendly character is reproduced and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 18-26(B), in the third pseudo-variable display, a losing combination ("579") is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. ) is temporarily stopped.

Figure 18-26 (C) shows 4 during the final time-saving change after the appearance of a friendly character as a suggestion of gaseous super reach in response to the completion of the third pseudo-variable display during the final time-saving change. It shows a state in which the pseudo-variable display for the first time is started, and the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 and 18-26, it is controlled to the battle mode in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the variable display result is "big hit" In the time saving final variation, the true super reach suggestion production , an example of the production operation when the successful battle production is executed after the friendly character appearance production is executed will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo variable displays executed in the time saving final variation will be described as an example. .

In this case, after the effects shown in FIGS. 18-25(A) to 18-25(J), FIGS. ) is executed. FIG. 18-26(D) shows a state in which a moving image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is being reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 . FIG. 18-26(E) shows a state in which a moving image showing how a friend character wins over an enemy character is being reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in a successful battle effect. . In FIG. 18-26 (F), in response to the completion of the time saving final variation, the combination ("777 ”) is derived, and the small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 to 18-27, it is controlled to the battle mode in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the variable display result is "losing". , an example of the production operation in the case where the failure battle production is executed after the friendly character appearance production is executed will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo variable displays executed in the time saving final variation will be described as an example. .

In this case, the rendering operations shown in FIGS. 18-25 (A) to 18-25 (J), 18-26 (A), 18-26 (B), and 18-26 (D) are executed. After that, the effect action shown in FIG. 18-27(A) is executed. FIG. 18-27(A) shows a state in which a moving image showing how a friend character is defeated by an enemy character is being reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 . In FIG. 18-27 (B), after the failure battle production ends in response to the elapse of the predetermined production period, the fourth pseudo-variable display during the final fluctuation of the time saving starts, and "left", "middle" , 9L, 9C, and 9R, respectively. In FIG. 18-27 (C), in response to the completion of the time saving final variation, the reach loss combination ("767 ”) is derived, and the small symbols of the same reach-losing combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 to 18-27, it is controlled to the battle mode in the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the variable display result is "big hit" In the time-saving final variation, the gasse super reach suggestion production , an effect operation example in which the relief effect is executed after the friend character appearance effect is executed will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case in which the friendly character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo variable displays executed in the time saving final variation will be described as an example. .

In this case, Figures 18-25 (A) ~ Figure 18-25 (J), Figure 18-26 (A), Figure 18-26 (B), Figure 18-26 (D), Figure 18-27 (A) 18-27(D) is executed. FIG. 18-27(D) shows a state in which a moving image showing appearance of a rescue character is being reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the rescue effect. FIG. 18-27(E) shows a state in which a moving image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the relief effect, showing how the friend character wins over the enemy character. In FIG. 18-27 (F), in response to the completion of the time saving final variation, the hit combination ("777 ”) is derived, and the small symbols of the same winning combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 095AK, when the pattern fanning mode is controlled (controlled to the first effect state), the current variable display, the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage, When at least one variation display is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small win game state, a success pattern effect is executed as a super reach effect (specific effect) that displays the success result (specific effect result). configured as possible. Further, in the characteristic portion 095AK, when the battle mode is controlled (controlled to the second effect state), the current variable display and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory are performed at least twice. When the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, a success battle effect can be executed as a super ready-to-win effect for displaying a success result. Further, in the characteristic part 095AK, after being controlled to an advantageous state, the first state such as the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit X or the small hit via the big hit A, and the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit via the big hit B A second state that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first state, such as a post-hit control state, is configured to be controllable, and when controlled to the battle mode, this time Controlled to an advantageous state in at least one of the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, a second special figure jackpot Y as a second state or When it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the successful battle performance can be executed. Also, in the characteristic portion 095AK, when the battle mode is controlled, one of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and the current variation display is controlled to an advantageous state. If the variable display different from the one-time variable display among the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the second holding memory at the end of the time saving state is not controlled to an advantageous state, the performance is different from the super ready-to-win performance and is advantageous. It is configured to be able to execute a relief effect (special effect) suggesting that the state is controlled. Specifically, in the characteristic part 095AK, when the battle mode is controlled, one of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory is controlled to be in an advantageous state, After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X or the jackpot A via the small jackpot as the first state, and the current fluctuation display and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second holding storage are performed. , the relief effect can be executed when the variable display different from the one-time variable display is not controlled to be in an advantageous state. In addition, in the characteristic part 095AK, it is configured to be able to execute a super reach suggestive effect (suggestive effect) that suggests that a super reach effect will be executed, and when it is controlled in the battle mode, it is in the pattern fanning mode. It is configured to be able to execute the super reach suggesting effect at a lower rate than when it is being controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 095AK, when the control to the pattern fanning mode is finished, a different effect from when the control to the battle mode is finished can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Further, the characterizing portion 095AK is configured to be controllable to any one of the design fanning mode and the battle mode depending on the player's selection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 095AK, when it is controlled to the pattern fanning mode, it is configured to be able to execute the super reach effect in the pattern fanning mode (first performance mode), and when it is controlled to the battle mode. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the super ready-to-win production in a battle mode (second production mode) different from the pattern fanning mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 095AK, the variable display of the second special symbol (second identification information) is controlled to a time saving state (specific state) in which the variable display is performed at a higher rate than the normal state, and the time saving final variation (predetermined variable display) is being executed, the super reach effect can be executed, and when the time-saving final variation is being executed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed. It is configured to be able to execute a super ready-to-win suggestive effect during a period in which the display (special variable display) is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

In the above-described embodiment, the post-hit control state of the second special-figure jackpot Y or the jackpot via small hit B is described as the second state. However, this is only an example, and the second state is an arbitrary state that is more likely to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first state, such as a post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X or a jackpot via a small jackpot A. can be Hereinafter, a modification will be described in which the hit type includes a variable probability big hit that is controlled to a variable probability state as the second state after the end of the big hit game state.

Figures 18-28 show the hit classification table for this variant. In the hit type table shown in FIG. 18-28, the hit types are the first special big hit X, the first special big hit Y, the second special big hit X, the second special big hit Y, and the big hit via small hit A. , In addition to the small-hit via-jack B, a first special-design jackpot Z, a second special-design jackpot Z, and a small-hit via-jack jackpot C are provided. The first special symbol jackpot Z is a symbol jackpot generated directly based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol jackpot Z is a symbol jackpot generated directly based on the variation display of the second special symbol. be. Both the first special figure jackpot Z and the second special figure jackpot Z are jackpots in which the big winning opening is opened eight times. The small hit via big win C is a small hit via big win generated by V winning via a small win based on the variable display of the second special symbol. The big win via small win C is a big win in which the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds×10 times), and then the big winning opening is opened eight times (8R) under the condition of V winning.

The first special figure jackpot Z, the second special figure jackpot Z, and the small jackpot via jackpot C are all jackpots controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, and are called variable probability jackpots. The variable probability state is a state in which high-base control and time-saving control are performed, and variable probability control is performed in which the probability that the result of variable display of special symbols is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state or time-saving state. The definite variable state is advantageous for the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved and the "big hit" is likely to occur.

The post-hit control state of the first special figure big win Z, the second special figure big win Z, and the small win via big win C can be continued in the variable probability state until the next big win game state is started. When controlled to the probability variable state as the post-hit control state, there is a high possibility of being controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state compared to the case of being controlled to the time-saving state as the post-hit control state. That is, in this modification, after the control to the big hit game state as an advantageous state is completed, it becomes the first state such as the time saving state as the control state after the second special figure big hit X or the big hit A via the small hit. A second state having a higher possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first state, such as a post-hit control state and a probability variable state as a post-hit control state of a second special figure big win Z or a big win C via a small win. It is configured so as to be controllable in a post-hit control state.

In the post-hit control state of the second special big win Z or the big win C via the small win, the probability variable state can be continued until the next big win game state is started, and in the probability variable state, the ratio is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. A big hit occurs. Therefore, when the second special figure jackpot Z or jackpot via jackpot C is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is finished, the player does not shoot the game ball when the control state is controlled to the probability variable state as the post-win control state. Except for cases, a big hit always occurs before the probability change state ends. Therefore, when the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Z or the jackpot C via the small jackpot, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is entered in the probability variable state as the post-hit control state after the jackpot game state ends. By being controlled, it is substantially decided to be controlled twice to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this modification, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second pending storage currently stored, In at least one variation display, when controlled to the big win game state of the second special big win Z or the small win game state in which the win type at the time of occurrence of the V winning is the big win C via the small win, as the time-saving final variable performance. A successful battle production may be configured to be executable. That is, when the time-saving final variation is being executed in a state controlled by the battle mode, at least one variation of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation storage When it is controlled to an advantageous state in the display, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit Z or the small hit via big hit C as the second state, as a time-saving final variation effect A successful battle production may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, when the battle mode is controlled, by executing the successful battle effect, the current variable display and the variable display corresponding to the currently stored second reservation memory , to be controlled to an advantageous state at least twice, or to be substantially determined to be controlled to an advantageous state at least twice, and to make game characteristics different from the pattern fanning mode. can be done.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, when it is controlled in the time-saving state, it has been described as being controllable to any one of the design fanning mode and the battle mode. However, this is only an example, and when it is controlled in the time-saving state, it may be configured to be controllable in an effect mode different from any of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode. For example, when it is controlled in a time-saving state, it is controlled to a production mode in which a production using a character that is not used for production is executed when it is controlled to a pattern fanning mode or a battle mode, a pattern fanning mode, or a battle mode. It may be configured to be controllable to an effect mode in which BGM, which is not output when the player is on, is output from the speaker 27.例文帳に追加

In the above-described embodiment, during the jackpot end performance period in which the jackpot end performance for notifying that the control to the jackpot game state is completed is executed, any performance mode is controlled in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. has been described as being selectable by the player. However, this is only an example, and selection of the presentation mode by the player can be accepted at any timing. For example, during the period in which the last round (final round) of a plurality of rounds (jackpot game) executed in the jackpot game state is being executed, which production mode is controlled in the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. It may be configured so that the player can select which one. Specifically, during the period in which the last round in the jackpot game state is being executed, the mode selection effect shown in the above embodiment can be executed, and the push button 120 is pushed when the mode selection effect is being executed. The effect mode may be selectable based on the detection of the mode selection operation by.

In the above-described embodiment, when the mode selection effect is being executed, the effect mode can be selected by the push button 120 as the operation means based on the detection of the pressing operation on the push button 120 as the mode selection operation. was explained as being However, this is only an example, and selection of the presentation mode by the player can be accepted in any manner. For example, the stick controller 122 as an operation means capable of detecting an operation by the player detects an operation of tilting the stick controller 122 forward as a mode selection operation, thereby enabling selection of the production mode. good too.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 095AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portions 89AK to 92AK. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

For example, the characteristic portion 89AK may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 095AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 095AK, the specific variable display is stored in the specific variable display and the second reserve storage buffer (hold storage means) when the specific variable display is executed. A variable display corresponding to the reserved information, and a notice effect and a display result corresponding effect (specific notification) can be executed in relation to the variable display, and it is not controlled to a big hit game state (advantageous state) based on the specific variable display. A notice effect or a display result corresponding effect for notifying that the specific variable display is not controlled to the jackpot game state when the specific reservation information related to the variable display to be controlled to the jackpot game state is not stored in the second reservation storage buffer. is executed, and in the variable display based on the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer after the end of the specific variable display, the final stop pattern (predetermined display result) of the losing combination as the display result of the small pattern (reduced identification information) may be configured to be derivable. In this case, when not controlled to the jackpot game state based on the specific variable display and the specific hold information is stored in the second hold storage buffer, to inform that the specific variable display is controlled to the jackpot game state. , and the variable display based on the specific hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer after the end of the specific variable display, the display result of the small pattern is lost. It is possible to derive a special display result composed of some small symbols that constitute the final stop symbols of the combination and special identification information that is not included in the small symbols that constitute the final stop symbols of the losing combination. In the variable display based on the reservation information, it may be configured to be able to inform in a manner different from the advance notice effect and the display result corresponding effect that it is controlled to the big hit game state. Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot game state is the jackpot game state (first advantageous state) of the first special figure jackpot C, and the first special bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state of the first special figure jackpot C. Figure jackpot A, first special jackpot B, second special jackpot, jackpot via jackpot X to Z jackpot gaming state (second advantageous state), first special jackpot A, first special jack When controlled to any one of the jackpot game states of the jackpot B, the second special jackpot, and the jackpot X to Z via the jackpot, the display result of the drawing pattern (identification information) is the red 7 production as the specific identification information. A specific display result composed only of a pattern and a small pattern or a performance pattern of gold 7 and a small pattern is derived, and the small pattern different from the special identification information constituting the special display result is predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information. may be configured to include Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 095AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 095AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
Production state control means (for example, FIG. 18 -6, Figure 18-7, Figure 18-9, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-26, etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. If the variable display being controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the reserve storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one-time variable display, the performance different from the specific performance and a special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27 etc.) and
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, super reach suggestive effect, etc.) suggesting that the specific effect is executed , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.) and
further comprising
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a lower rate when being controlled to the second effect state than when being controlled to the first effect state (for example, FIG. 18- 14, Figures 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

(2) Another game machine related to the characteristic part 095AK,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, a first state (for example, a second special figure jackpot X, a post-hit control state of a small jackpot via jackpot A, etc.) and the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state rather than the first state. is high second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit B, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit C, etc.) State control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.);
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
Production state control means (for example, FIG. 18 -6, Figure 18-7, Figure 18-9, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , and when controlled to the second state after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect that displays the result of the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. one of the variable display being controlled and controlled to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state and being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the advantageous state is controlled can be executed. means (e.g., FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, super reach suggestive effect, etc.) suggesting that the specific effect is executed , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.) and
further comprising
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a lower rate when being controlled to the second effect state than when being controlled to the first effect state (for example, FIG. 18- 14, Figures 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine (1) or (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 095AK,
The effect state control means can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state according to the player's selection (for example, FIGS. 18-9, 18-10, and FIG. 18-21, Fig. 18-25, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic portion 095AK,
The specific effect execution means is
When it is controlled to the first production state, it is possible to execute the specific production in the first production mode (for example, pattern fanning mode, etc.) (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22 Such),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the specific effect can be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, a battle mode, etc.) (for example, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18- 14, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic portion 095AK,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol, etc.) (eg, FIGS. 1, 3, 6 to Figure 10, etc.),
Variable display of the second identification information can be controlled to a specific state (for example, time saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is performed at a higher rate than the normal state (for example, FIGS. 18-2, 18-4, 18-5, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-11, Figure 18-20, Figure 18-28, etc.),
The specific effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when being controlled to the specific state and a predetermined variable display (for example, time saving final variation etc.) is being executed (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, Figure 18-11, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-15, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.),
While the predetermined variable display is being performed, a special variable display (for example, a pseudo variable display) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, FIG. 18-6 , FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-17, 18-19 to 18-22, 18-25 to 18-27, etc.),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a period in which the special variable display is executed once when the predetermined variable display is being executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6 and 18). -7, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-17, Figure 18-19, Figure 18-20, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-26, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic portion 095AK,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (for example, production patterns, etc.),
Specific notification execution means (for example, advance notice effect processing in step AKS108, display result corresponding effect in step AKS110) capable of executing specific notification (for example, advance notice effect, display result corresponding effect Production control CPU 101 etc.) that executes processing,
Reduced variable display means (for example, small pattern display area 9K of effect display device 9, etc.) capable of executing variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small pattern) in a form that is smaller than identification information;
further comprising
The specific notification execution means is associated with the specific variable display in the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific variable display is being executed. It is possible to execute the specific notification,
Control to the advantageous state in the specific variable display when specific suspension information relating to the variable display to be controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display is not stored in the suspension storage means. Execution of the specific notification for notifying that it will not be performed, and a predetermined display result (for example, It is possible to derive the final stop pattern of the losing combination, etc.)
When the specified hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state on the basis of the specified variable display, the above for notifying that the specified variable display will be controlled to the advantageous state. executing the specific notification, and in the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the specific variable display, the predetermined display result as the display result of the reduced identification information; It is possible to derive a special display result composed of a part of the reduced identification information constituting the reduced identification information and the special identification information not included in the reduced identification information constituting the predetermined display result, and a variable display based on the specific reserved information. In can be notified in a manner different from the specific notification that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot C) and a second advantageous state (for example, the first special figure jackpot A, the first If it is one of the special figure jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot X to Z via the small hit, etc.)
When controlled to the second advantageous state, as a display result of the identification information, a specific display composed only of specific identification information (for example, red 7 effect pattern and small pattern, gold 7 effect pattern and small pattern, etc.) let us derive the result,
reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information;
You may do so.
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 096AK)
The feature 095AK includes the following feature 096AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 096AK,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
Production state control means (for example, FIG. 18 -6, Figure 18-7, Figure 18-9, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-26, etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. If the variable display being controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the reserve storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one-time variable display, the performance different from the specific performance and a special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27, etc.),
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute a different effect from when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14 , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(2) Another game machine related to the characteristic part 096AK,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, a first state (for example, a second special figure jackpot X, a post-hit control state of a small jackpot via jackpot A, etc.) and the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state rather than the first state. is high second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit B, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the small hit via the big hit C, etc.) State control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.);
pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
It is possible to display a specific effect result (such as a success result) that informs that the control is in the advantageous state, and a predetermined effect result (such as a failure result) that informs that the control is not in the advantageous state. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18-11, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-19, FIG. 18-20, FIG. 18-22, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.) and
Production state control means (for example, FIG. 18 -6, Figure 18-7, Figure 18-9, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.) and
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. , it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-14, FIG. 18-22, etc.),
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. , and when controlled to the second state after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect that displays the result of the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. one of the variable display being controlled and controlled to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state and being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the advantageous state is controlled can be executed. further comprising means (e.g., FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.);
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute a different effect from when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14 , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine (1) or (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 096AK,
The effect state control means can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state according to the player's selection (for example, FIGS. 18-9, 18-10, and FIG. 18-21, Fig. 18-25, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(4) In the game machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic portion 096AK,
The specific effect execution means is
When it is controlled to the first production state, it is possible to execute the specific production in the first production mode (for example, pattern fanning mode, etc.) (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22 Such),
When being controlled to the second effect state, the specific effect can be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, a battle mode, etc.) (for example, FIG. 18-7, FIG. 18- 14, Figures 18-26, Figures 18-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic portion 096AK,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, super reach suggestive effect, etc.) suggesting that the specific effect is executed , FIGS. 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.);
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol, etc.) (eg, FIGS. 1, 3, 6 to Figure 10, etc.),
Variable display of the second identification information can be controlled to a specific state (for example, time saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is performed at a higher rate than the normal state (for example, FIGS. 18-2, 18-4, 18-5, Figure 18-10, Figure 18-11, Figure 18-20, Figure 18-28, etc.),
The specific effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when being controlled to the specific state and a predetermined variable display (for example, time saving final variation etc.) is being executed (for example, FIG. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, Figure 18-11, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-15, Figure 18-21, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-25 to Figure 18-27, etc.),
While the predetermined variable display is being performed, a special variable display (for example, a pseudo variable display) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, FIG. 18-6 , FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-17, 18-19 to 18-22, 18-25 to 18-27, etc.),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a period in which the special variable display is executed once when the predetermined variable display is being executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6 and 18). -7, Figure 18-14, Figure 18-17, Figure 18-19, Figure 18-20, Figure 18-22, Figure 18-26, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic portion 096AK,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (for example, production patterns, etc.),
Specific notification execution means (for example, advance notice effect processing in step AKS108, display result corresponding effect in step AKS110) capable of executing specific notification (for example, advance notice effect, display result corresponding effect Production control CPU 101 etc.) that executes processing,
Reduced variable display means (for example, small pattern display area 9K of effect display device 9, etc.) capable of executing variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small pattern) in a form that is smaller than identification information;
further comprising
The specific notification execution means is associated with the specific variable display in the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific variable display is being executed. It is possible to execute the specific notification,
Control to the advantageous state in the specific variable display when specific suspension information relating to the variable display to be controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display is not stored in the suspension storage means. Execution of the specific notification for notifying that it will not be performed, and a predetermined display result (for example, It is possible to derive the final stop pattern of the losing combination, etc.)
When the specified hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state on the basis of the specified variable display, the above for notifying that the specified variable display will be controlled to the advantageous state. executing the specific notification, and in the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the specific variable display, the predetermined display result as the display result of the reduced identification information; It is possible to derive a special display result composed of a part of the reduced identification information constituting the reduced identification information and the special identification information not included in the reduced identification information constituting the predetermined display result, and a variable display based on the specific reserved information. In can be notified in a manner different from the specific notification that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot C) and a second advantageous state (for example, the first special figure jackpot A, the first If it is one of the special figure jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot X to Z via the small hit, etc.)
When controlled to the second advantageous state, as a display result of the identification information, a specific display composed only of specific identification information (for example, red 7 effect pattern and small pattern, gold 7 effect pattern and small pattern, etc.) let us derive the result,
reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information;
You may do so.
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

1... Pachinko game machine 8a... First special symbol display device 8b... Second special symbol display device 9... Effect display device 31... Main board 80... Effect control board 100... Effect control microcomputer 101... Effect control CPU
560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
pending storage means capable of storing information on variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific effect result informing that the control is to be in the advantageous state and a predetermined effect result informing that the control is not to be in the advantageous state;
an effect state control means capable of controlling a first effect state and a second effect state in a specific state in which variable display is executed at a higher rate than a normal state ;
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result,
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. When controlled to, it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result,
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. If the variable display being controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the reserve storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one-time variable display, the performance different from the specific performance and further comprising a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
When the control to the first effect state ends, an effect different from that when the control to the second effect state ends can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
state control means capable of controlling, after being controlled to the advantageous state, a first state and a second state having a higher possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first state;
pending storage means capable of storing information on variable display that has not yet been executed as pending information;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific effect result informing that the control is to be in the advantageous state and a predetermined effect result informing that the control is not to be in the advantageous state;
an effect state control means capable of controlling a first effect state and a second effect state in the first state or the second state ;
with
The specific effect execution means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, it is possible to execute the specific effect that displays the specific effect result,
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when being controlled to the second effect state. and is controlled to the second state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute the specific effect of displaying the specific effect result,
When being controlled to the second effect state, the advantageous state is achieved in one variable display out of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. one of the variable display being controlled and controlled to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state and being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. further comprising a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that is a different effect from the specific effect and suggests control to be in the advantageous state when the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the control to the first effect state ends, an effect different from that when the control to the second effect state ends can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images